ARCT1F389E-2_0706.

ai

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

®
FP0

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
User’s Manual

FP0 User’s Manual

These materials are printed on ECF pulp.

These materials are printed with earth-friendly vegetable-based (soybean oil) ink.
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Please contact ..........

Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Automation Controls Business Unit
쮿 Head Office: 1048, Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8686, Japan
쮿 Telephone: +81-6-6908-1050
쮿 Facsimile: +81-6-6908-5781
http://www.mew.co.jp/ac/e/
FP0 User’s Manual
All Rights Reserved © 2007 COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. ARCT1F389E-2 ’07.06
ARCT1F389E-2 200706 Specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan.
ACG-M389E-2

http://www.mew.co.jp/ac/e/fasys/ Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Safety Precautions
Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents.
To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use.
Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safe.
This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.

WARNING
If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by
mishandling of the product.
-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole
system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor.
-Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion.
-Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium
battery or other electronic parts.

CAUTION
If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is assumed
by mishandling of the product.
-To prevent abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values less
than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assure in these specifications.
-Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could lead to abnormal exothermic heat or
smoke generation.
-Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock..
-Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit.
-Connect the wires or connectors securely.
The loose connection might cause abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation
-Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the
inside of the product. It might cause exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power
supply is on.

Copyright / Trademarks
-This manual and its contents are copylighted.
-You may not copy this manual,in whole or part,without written consent of Matsushita Electric
Works,Ltd.
-Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
-All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
-Matsushita Electric Works,Ltd. pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the
Design and performance of its products, therefore,we reserve the right to change the manual/
product without notice.
FP0 Introduction

Introduction
This manual explains hardware configurations, installation, wiring procedures, I/O
allocations and maintenance.

i
Before You Start FP0

Before You Start

Installation environment
Do not use the unit where it will be exposed to the following:
Direct sunlight and ambient temperatures outside the
range of 0 C to 55 C/32 F to 131 F.

Ambient humidity outside the range of 30% to 85% RH

and sudden temperature changes causing condensation.

Inflammable or corresive gas.

Excessive vibration or shock.

Excessive airborne dust or metal particles

Water in any from including spray or mist.

Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents

or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic
soda.
Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage
equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio
transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate
high switching surges.
Static electricity
In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause
problems. Before touching the unit, always touch a
grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static
electricity.
Cleaning
Do not use thinner based cleaners because they deform
the unit case and fade the colors.
Power supplies
An insulated power supply with an internal protective
circuit should be used. The power supply for the FP0
control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an
incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal circuit
may be damaged or destroyed. If using a power supply
without a protective circuit, power should be supplied
through a protective element such as a fuse.

ii
FP0 Before You Start

Power supply sequence

Have the power supply sequence such that the power
supply of the FP0 control unit turns OFF before the
power supply for I/O.
If the power supply for I/O is turned OFF before the
power supply of FP0 control unit, the FP0 control unit
will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an
unscheduled operation.
Before turning ON the power
When turning ON the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given
below.
When carrying out construction, check to make sure that
there are no scraps of wiring, particularly conductive
fragments, adhering to the unit.
Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power
supply voltage are all correct.
Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal
screws.

Set the mode switch to PROG. mode.

iii
Manuals To Be Used FP0

Manuals To Be Used
The required manuals differ according to the units to be used. See the table below.
A: Available
N/A: Not available

Unit type User’s manual Programming manual Manual No.

No.ARCT1F389E No.ARCT1F313E
FP0 Control unit A A N/A
FP0 Expansion unit A A N/A
FP0 Thermocouple unit A A ARCT1F366E
FP0 Analog I/O unit A A ARCT1F390E
FP0 A/D conversion unit A A ARCT1F321E
FP0 D/A conversion unit A A ARCT1F382E
FP0 CC−Link slave unit A A ARCT1F380E
FP0 I/O link unit A A N/A
FP0 Power supply unit A A N/A

− A suffix “−1” is added to the end of manual numbers when the manuals
have been revised. The final number increases for every revision.
− <FPWIN GR Technical Guide Book ARCT1F332E> is supplied with the
standard ladder tool software FPWIN GR.
− <FPWIN Pro Technical Guide Book ARCT1F405E> is supplied with the
programming tool software FPWIN Pro.

Key Point: The PDF versions are provided at our website.

http://www.mew.co.jp/ac/e/fasys/ (User registration is required. Free of charge)

iv
FP0 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview

1.1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3
1.1.1 FP0 Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3
1.1.2 FP0 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 4
1.1.3 Intelligent Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 5
1.1.4 Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 5
1.1.5 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 5
1.1.6 Options and Additional Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 6
1.2 Expansion Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 7
1.3 Combination Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
1.3.1 Relay Output Type Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
1.3.2 Transistor Output Type Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 9
1.4 Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10
1.4.1 Discontinued Products of Programming Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10

Chapter 2 Control Units

2.1 Parts and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 3

2.1.1 Control Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 4
2.1.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 6
2.1.1.2 Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 6
2.1.1.3 Tool Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 6
2.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7
2.2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7
2.2.1.1 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7
2.2.1.2 Current Consumed by the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 8
2.2.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 10
2.2.3 Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 14
2.2.3.1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input
ON Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 15
2.2.4 Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 16
2.2.4.1 Relay Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 16
2.2.4.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 17
2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 18
2.3.1 Relay Output Type (C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM/C14RS/
C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 18
2.3.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 19
2.3.2.1 NPN Open Collector Type
(C16T/C16CT/C32T/C32CT/T32CT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 19

v
Table of Contents FP0

2.3.2.2 PNP Open Collector Type

(C16P/C16CP/C32P/C32CP/T32CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 21
2.4 Pin Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 22
2.4.1 C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 22
2.4.2 C14RS/C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 22
2.4.3 C16T/C16CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 23
2.4.4 C16P/C16CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 24
2.4.5 C32T/C32CT/T32CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 25
2.4.6 C32P/C32CP/T32CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 26
2.5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 27

Chapter 3 Expansion I/O Units

3.1 Parts and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3

3.1.1 Expansion I/O Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 4
3.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.2 Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.2.1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input
ON Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 7
3.2.3 Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 8
3.2.3.1 Relay Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 8
3.2.3.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9
3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 10
3.3.1 Relay Output Type (E8RS/E8RM/E16RS/E16RM) . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 10
3.3.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 11
3.3.2.1 NPN Open Collector Type (E16T/E32T) . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 11
3.3.2.2 PNP Open Collector Type (E16P/E32P) . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 13
3.3.3 Expansion Input Units (E8X/E16X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 14
3.3.4 Expansion Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 15
3.3.4.1 NPN Open Collector Type (E8YT/E16YT) . . . . . . . . 3 − 15
3.3.4.2 PNP Open Collector Type (E8YP/E16YP) . . . . . . . . 3 − 17
3.4 Pin Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 18
3.4.1 E8RS/E8RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 18
3.4.2 E16RS/E16RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 19
3.4.3 E16T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 20
3.4.4 E16P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 21
3.4.5 E32T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 22
3.4.6 E32P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 23
3.4.7 E8X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 24
3.4.8 E16X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 25
3.4.9 E8YT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 26
3.4.10 E8YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 26

vi
FP0 Table of Contents

3.4.11 E16YT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 27
3.4.12 E16YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 28

Chapter 4 S−LINK Control Unit

4.1 Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 3

4.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 5
4.2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 5
4.2.2 S−LINK Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 6
4.3 Wiring the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7
4.3.1 Wiring to Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7
4.3.2 Wiring to S−LINK Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7
4.4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 9
4.5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 10
4.6 S−LINK System Address Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11
4.6.1 Recognizing the Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11
4.6.2 Address Setting of S−LINK I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 12
4.7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 13
4.8 Judging Errors Address Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14

Chapter 5 I/O Allocation

5.1 I/O Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3

5.2 Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 4
5.3 Expansion I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 5

Chapter 6 Installation

6.1 Adding Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 3

6.2 Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 5
6.3 Attachment to DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 8
6.4 Installation Using FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 9
6.5 Installation Using FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 10

Chapter 7 Wiring

7.1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3

vii
Table of Contents FP0

7.1.1 Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3

7.1.2 Emergency Stop Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.3 Start Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.4 Momentary Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.1.5 Protecting Power Supply and Output Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 5
7.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 7
7.4 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 9
7.4.1 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 9
7.4.2 LED-Equipped Reed Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 10
7.4.3 Two-Wire Type Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 10
7.4.4 LED-Equipped Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 11
7.5 Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 12
7.5.1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 12
7.5.2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 13
7.6 Wiring the Terminal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 14
7.7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 16
7.8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 18
7.8.1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 19
7.9 Wiring the RS232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 20

Chapter 8 Precautions During Programming

8.1 Use of Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3

8.1.1 Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3
8.1.2 When Output is Repeated
with an OT, KP, SET, or RST Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 4
8.2 Handling BCD Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 5
8.2.1 BCD Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 5
8.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 5
8.3 Handling Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7
8.3.1 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7
8.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers . . . . . 8 − 7
8.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 8
8.4 Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 10
8.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 10
8.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 10
8.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 11
8.4.4 Points to Check in Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 12
8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 13
8.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 13

viii
FP0 Table of Contents

8.5.2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 14

8.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 16
8.6 Precautions for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 18
8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 19
8.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 19
8.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 20
8.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 22
8.7.4 Changing Modes in FP Programmer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 23
8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 24
8.8.1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer II . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 24
8.8.2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 25
8.9 Processing During Forced Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 28
8.10 Setting the Clock/Calendar Timer (T32CT type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 29

Chapter 9 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.1 Outline of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 3

9.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built−in High−speed Counter . . . . . . . . . 9 − 3
9.1.2 Performance of Built−in High−speed Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 4
9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 5
9.2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 5
9.2.2 Functions and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 7
9.3 High−speed Counter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 9
9.3.1 Outline of High−speed Counter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 9
9.3.2 Types of Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 9
9.3.3 I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 11
9.3.4 Instructions Used with High−speed Counter Function . . . . . . . . . 9 − 12
9.3.5 Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 14
9.4 Pulse Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 18
9.4.1 Outline of Pulse Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 18
9.4.2 Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 19
9.4.3 I/O Allocation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 20
9.4.4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 22
9.4.5 Sample Program for Positioning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 25
9.5 PWM Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 33
9.5.1 Outline of PWM Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 33
9.5.2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 33

Chapter 10 General−use Serial Communications

10.1 General−use Serial Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 3

ix
Table of Contents FP0

10.1.1 General−use Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 3

10.1.2 Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 3
10.1.3 Data Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 4
10.2 System Register Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 5
10.3 Operations When Using General−use Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 8
10.3.1 If “None” is Set for Start and Terminal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 8
10.3.2 If “Yes” has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes
(Start Code: STX, Terminal Code: ETX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 9

Chapter 11 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

11.1 Self-Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 3

11.1.1 Allowing Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 4
11.1.2 Continuing After an Operation Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 4
11.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 5
11.2.1 ERROR/ALARM LED is Blinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 5
11.2.2 ERROR/ALARM LED is ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 7
11.2.3 All LEDs are OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 7
11.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 8
11.2.5 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 10
11.2.6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 10

Chapter 12 Specifications

12.1 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 3

12.2 I/O Allocation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 8
12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 11
12.4 FP0−SL1 S−LINK Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 13
12.5 Specification: Power Supply Unit I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 14
12.5.1 FP0 Power Supply Unit (AFP0634) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 14
12.5.2 FP0 I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 14

Chapter 13 Dimensions

13.1 Control Unit and Expansion I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 3

13.1.1 FP0-C10RS/C10CRS/C14RS/C14CRS/
E8RS/E16RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 3
13.1.2 FP0-C10RM/C10CRM/C14RM/C14CRM/
E8RM/E16RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 3
13.1.3 FP0-C16T/C16CT/C16P/C16CP/E16T/E16P/E8X/E8YT/E8YP/
E32T/E32P/E16X/E16YT/E16YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 4

x
FP0 Table of Contents

13.1.4 FP0-C32T/C32CT/C32P/C32CP/T32CT/T32CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 4
13.1.5 FP0 S−LINK Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 5
13.2 FP0 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 5
13.3 Mounting on DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 6
13.4 FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 7
13.5 FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 8
13.6 Detailed Specifications of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 9
13.7 Connection (between RS232C port and PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 10

Chapter 14 Appendix

14.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers . . . . 14 - 3

14.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5
14.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 17
14.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 20
14.2 Table of Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 − 30
14.3 Table of High-level Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 − 64
14.4 Table of Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 − 124
14.5 MEWTOCOL−COM Communication Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 − 138
14.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 139
14.7 ASCII Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 140

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I−1

Record of changes ................................................... R−1

xi
Table of Contents FP0

xii
Chapter 1
Overview

1.1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3
1.1.1 FP0 Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 3
1.1.2 FP0 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 4
1.1.3 Intelligent Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 5
1.1.4 Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 5
1.1.5 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 5
1.1.6 Options and Additional Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 6

1.2 Expansion Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 7

1.3 Combination Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8

1.3.1 Relay Output Type Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
1.3.2 Transistor Output Type Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 9

1.4 Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 10

Overview FP0

1−2
FP0 Overview

1.1 Components

1.1 Components

1.1.1 FP0 Control Units

Built−in Specifications
Product memory Power Product
Number of Connection Part No.
name (Program supply Input Output No.
capacuty) I/O points type
voltage
EEPROM 10 Input: 6 24 V DC 24 V DC Relay out- Terminal block FP0−C10RS AFP02123
FP0 C10 (2 7k steps)
(2.7k Output: 4 Sink/Sourse put: 2 A
Control Unit ( common) Molex connector FP0−C10RM AFP02113

FP0 C10 EEPROM 10 Input: 6 24 V DC 24 V DC Relay out- Terminal block FP0−C10CRS AFP02123C
Control Unit (2.7k steps) Output: 4 Sink/Sourse put: 2 A
with ( common)
RS232C Molex connector FP0−C10CRM AFP02113C
port
EEPROM 14 Input: 8 24 V DC 24 V DC Relay out- Terminal block FP0−C14RS AFP02223
FP0 C14 (2 7k steps)
(2.7k Output: 6 Sink/Sourse put: 2 A
Control Unit ( common) Molex connector FP0−C14RM AFP02213

FP0 C14 EEPROM 14 Input: 8 24 V DC 24 V DC Relay out- Terminal block FP0−C14CRS AFP02223C
Control Unit (2.7k steps) Output: 6 Sink/Sourse put: 2 A
with ( common)
RS232C Molex connector FP0−C14CRM AFP02213C
port
EEPROM 16 Input: 8 24 V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FP0−C16T AFP02343
(2.7k steps) Output: 8 Sink/Sourse otuput: NPN
( common) 0.1 A
FP0 C16
Control Unit Transister FP0−C16P AFP02353
otuput: PNP
0.1 A
EEPROM 16 Input: 8 24 V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FP0−C16CT AFP02343C
FP0 C16 (2.7k steps) Output: 8 Sink/Sourse otuput: NPN
Control Unit ( common) 0.1 A
with
RS232C Transister FP0−C16CP AFP02353C
port otuput: PNP
0.1 A
EEPROM 32 Input: 16 24 V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FP0−C32T AFP02543
(5k steps) Output: 16 Sink/Sourse otuput: NPN
( common) 0.1 A
FP0 C32
Control Unit Transister FP0−C32P AFP02553
otuput: PNP
0.1 A
EEPROM 32 Input: 16 24 V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FP0−C32CT AFP02543C
FP0 C32 (5k steps) Output: 16 Sink/Sourse otuput: NPN
Control Unit ( common) 0.1 A
with
RS232C Transister FP0−C32CP AFP02553C
port otuput: PNP
0.1 A

FP0 T32 EEPROM 32 Input: 16 24 V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FP0−T32CT AFP02643C

Control Unit (10k steps) Output: 16 Sink/Sourse otuput: NPN
with ( common) 0.1 A
RS232C
port and Transister FP0−T32CP AFP02653C
Clock/Cal- otuput: PNP
endar func- 0.1 A
tion

FP0 S−LINK EEPROM 128 Input: 64 24 V DC — — Terminal block FP0−SL1 AFP02700

Control Unit (5k steps) (S− Output: 64
with LINK (S−LINK
RS232C sec- section)
port tion)

1−3
Overview FP0

1.1 Components

1.1.2 FP0 Expansion Units

Specifications
Product Power
Number of Connection Part No. Product No.
name supply Input Output
I/O points type
voltage
8 Input: 8 — 24 V DC — MIL connector FP0−E8X AFP03003
Sink/Sourse
( common)
8 Input:
p 4 24 V DC 24 V DC Relayy output:
p 2A Terminal block FP0−E8RS AFP03023
Output: 4 Sink/Sourse
FP0 E8 ( common) Molex connector FP0−E8RM AFP03013
Expansion
Unit 8 Input: 8 24 V DC — Relay output: 2 A Terminal block FP0−E8YRS AFP03020
8 Output: 8 — — Transister otuput: MIL connector FP0−E8YT AFP03040
NPN 0.1 A
Transister otuput: FP0−E8TP AFP03050
PNP 0.1 A
16 Input: 16 — 24 V DC — MIL connector FP0−E16X AFP03003
Sink/Sourse
( common)
16 Input:
p 8 24 V DC 24 V DC Relayy output:
p 2A Terminal block FP0−E16RS AFP03323
Output: 8 Sink/Sourse
( common) Molex connector FP0−E16RM AFP03313

FP0 E16 16 Input: 8 — 24 V DC Transister otuput: MIL connector FP0−E16T AFP03343

Expansion Output: 8 Sink/Sourse NPN 0.1 A
U i
Unit ( common))
Transister otuput: FP0−E16P AFP03353
PNP 0.1 A
16 Output: 16 — — Transister otuput: MIL connector FP0−E16YT AFP03340
NPN 0.1 A
Transister otuput: FP0−E16YP AFP03350
PNP 0.1 A
32 Input: 16 — 24 V DC Transister otuput: MIL connector FP0−E32T AFP03543
FP0 E32 Output: 16 /
Sink/Sourse NPN 0.1 A
E
Expansion
i ( common)
Unit Transister otuput: FP0−E32P AFP03553
PNP 0.1 A

Notes

1) The control units and relay output type expansion units come
with a power cable (part number AFP0581).
(The transistor output type expansion units need no power
cable.)
2) The terminal block type relay output units have 2 terminal
blocks (9 pins) made by Phoenix. Use a 2.5 mm .098 inch wide
screwdriver.
Preferably use the specific terminal block screwdriver (part
number AFP0806, Phoenix type code SZS0, 4 2.5 mm .098
inch) or equivalent.
3) The connector−type relay output units have 2 connectors
made by Nihon Molex (Molex type code 51067−0900, 9 pins).
Use the specific Molex connector press−fit tool (part number
AFP0805, Nihon Molex type code 57189−5000) or equivalent.
4) The transistor output units have a press−fit socket for
wire−pressed terminal cable and contacts.
Use the press−fit tool (part number AXY52000) for
wire−pressed terminal cable.

1−4
FP0 Overview

1.1 Components

1.1.3 Intelligent Units

Product
Specifications Part No. Product No.
name
FP0 Ther-
Ther K, J, T, R thermocouple, Resolution: 0.1 C FP0−TC4 AFP0420
mocouplel
Unit K, J, T, R thermocouple, Resolution: 0.1 C FP0−TC8 AFP0421
FP Web− Unit for connecting FP series/RS232C interface and Ethernet FP−WEB AFP0610
Server unit Web−Server function and E−mail sending function
Input specifications Number or channels 2 channels FP0−A21 AFP0480
Input range : 0 to 5 V, −10 to +10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 Analog 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
I/O unit Output specifications Number or channels 1 channels
Output range : −10 to +10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 A/D Input specifications Number or channels 8 channels FP0−A80 AFP0401
Converter Input range : 0 to 5 V, −10 to +10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
Unit 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 D/A Output
p specifications
p Number or channels 4 channels FP0−A04V AFP04121
C
Converter
t Output range : −10
10 to +10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
Unit 4 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000) FP0−A04I AFP04123

1.1.4 Link Units

Product Power supply Product

Specifications Part No.
name voltage No.
This unit is for making the FP0 function as a slave station of the CC−Link. 24 V DC FP0−CCLS AFP07943
FP0 CC−
Only one unit can be connected to the furthest right edge of the FP0 expansion bus.
Link Slave
Note: Accuracy will change if an FP0 thermocouple unit is used at the same time.
Unit
For details, please refer to the catalog or to the CC−Link Unit manual.
FP0 I/O Link This is a link unit designed to make the FP0 function as a station to MEWNET−F 24 V DC FP0−IOL AFP0732
Unit (remote I/O system).
C−NET This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the Computer link function for — — AFP15402
adapter S2 connecting to a host computer via C−NET. It comes with a 30 cm FP0 tool port
type cable. A power supply is not required.
(for FP0
side)
C−NET This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the Computer link function for 100 to 240 V DC — AFP8536
adapter connectingg to a network−connected PLC via C−NET from a host computer.
p
(RS485)
(for com- 24 V DC — AFP8532
puter side)
FP Connected with FP series PLCs, it conducts Ethernet communication, sends e−mail, and displays the FP−WEB AFP0610
Web−Server PLC data on HTML pages.
Unit

1.1.5 Power Supply Unit

Product
Product name Specifications Part No.
No.
Input voltage: 100 to 240 V AC FP0−PSA4 AFP0634
FP0 Power supply unit
Output: 0.7 A, 24 V DC

1−5
Overview FP0

1.1 Components

1.1.6 Options and Additional Parts

Product name Specifications Product No.
Data clear type AFP8670
FP Memory loader
Data hold type AFP8671
Relay output type AFP0806
Terminal screwdriver
Necessary when wiring terminals block (Phoenix).
Molex connector Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors. (MOLEX: 57189−5000) AFP0805
pressure contact tool
Multi−wire connector Necessary when wiring transistor output type connectors. AXY52000
pressure contact tool
FP0 Slim 30 type Screw−stop attachment plate for 30 mm/1.181 inch width the unit. AFP0811 (set for 10)
mounting plate
Slim type FP0 mounting Screw−stop attachment plate for FP0 expansion unit. Slim model. AFP0803 (set for 10)
plate
Flat type FP0 mounting Screw−stop attachment plate for FP0 control unit. Flat model. AFP0804 (set for 10)
plate

Relay output Molex type Loose wiring cable (9 leads) AWG20, with Molex socket attached at
Loose−wiring Length: 1 m/3.281 ft. AFP0551 (2 cable set)
I/O cable one end, 0 5 mm2, 1 set:
d 0.5 t 2 cables
bl (blue
(bl & white).
hit )
Length: 3 m/9.843 ft. AFP0553 (2 cable set)

Transistor output type Wire pressed terminal cable (10 leads) AWG22, 0.3 mm2 with con-
Wire−pressed con Length: 1 m/3.281 ft. AFP0521 (2 cable set)
I/O cable nectors
t attached
tt h d att one end,
d 1 set:
t 2 cables
bl (blue
(bl & white).
hit )
Length: 3 m/9.843 ft. AFP0523 (2 cable set)
Flat cable connector for If you are using flat cable connector, request the part specified below for a connector with an AXM110915
FPS/FP0 transistor type asymmetrical design to prevent mistaken polarity. (10−pin)
unit
Attaches to relay output and terminal block type. Additional part AFP0802
Terminal socket
(2 sockets per pack)
Attaches to relay output and Molex connector types. Additional part AFP0801
Molex socket
(2 sockets per pack)
Attaches to transistor output type. Additional part AFP0807
Wire−press socket
(2 sockets per pack)
Attaches to FP0 various units. Additional part Length: 1 m/3.281 ft. AFP0581
FP0 Power cable
(1 socket per pack)

1−6
FP0 Overview

1.2 Expansion Possibilities

1.2 Expansion Possibilities

Be sure to check that the units are added according to the following restrictions:
A maximum of three expansion I/O units or analog I/O units
can be connected to one control unit.

There are no restrictions on the combinations of the kind

control units and expansion units.
A combination of relay output types and transistor output
types is also possible.

The expansion unit can be attached directly to the control unit

easily. Special expansion cables, backplanes, and so forth,
are unnecessary as the expansion unit employs a stacking
system that uses expansion connector and expansion hooks
on the surface of the unit itself.

Control unit First Second Third

expansion unit expansion unit expansion unit

Maximum possible expansion is with a total of 3 units

Contollable I/O Points

Type of Control unit When the expansion unit is When the expansion unit is
control unit only the same output type as the a transistor output type
control unit
C10R 10 points max. 58 points max. 106 points
C14R 14 points max. 62 points max. 110 points
C16T/C16P 16 points max. 112 points max. 112 points
C32/T32 32 points max. 128 points max. 128 points

1−7
Overview FP0

1.3 Combination Possibilities

1.3 Combination Possibilities

1.3.1 Relay Output Type Units

Total number of Control First Second Third

I/O points = unit + expansion
I/O unit
+ expansion
I/O unit
+ expansion
I/O unit
10 10
Input: 6 Output: 4 = Input: 6 Output: 4

14 14
Input: 8 Output: 6 = Input: 8 Output: 6

18 10 8
Input: 10 Output: 8 = Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

22 14 8
Input: 12 Output: 10 = Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

26 10 16
Input: 14 Output: 12 = Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

10 8 8
= Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

30 14 16
Input: 16 Output: 14 = Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

14 8 8
= Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

34 10 16 8
Input: 18 Output: 16 = Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

10 8 8 8
= Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

38 14 16 8
Input: 20 Output: 18 = Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

14 8 8 8
= Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

42 10 16 16
Input: 22 Output: 20 = Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

10 16 8 8
= Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

46 14 16 16
Input: 24 Output: 22 = Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

14 16 8 8
= Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 4 Output: 4
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

50 10 16 16 8
Input: 26 Output: 24 = Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

54 14 16 16 8
Input: 28 Output: 26 = Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 4 Output: 4

58 10 16 16 16
Input: 30 Output: 28 = Input: 6 Output: 4
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

62 14 16 16 16
Input: 32 Output: 30 = Input: 8 Output: 6
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

1−8
FP0 Overview

1.3 Combination Possibilities

1.3.2 Transistor Output Type Units

Total number of Control First Second Third

I/O points = unit + expansion
I/O unit
+ expansion
I/O unit
+ expansion
I/O unit
16 16
Input: 8 Output: 8 = Input: 8 Output: 8

32 32
Input: 16 Output: 16 = Input: 16 Output: 16

16 16
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

48 32 16
Input: 24 Output: 24 = Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

16 32
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 16 Output: 16

16 16 16
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

64 32 32
Input: 32 Output: 32 = Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16

32 16 16
= Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

16 32 16
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

16 16 16 16
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

80 32 32 16
Input: 40 Output: 40 = Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

32 16 16 16
= Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

16 32 32
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16

16 32 16 16
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

96 32 32 32
Input: 48 Output: 48 = Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16

32 32 16 16
= Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

16 32 32 16
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

112 32 32 32 16
Input: 56 Output: 56 = Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 8 Output: 8

16 32 32 32
= Input: 8 Output: 8
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16

128 32 32 32 32
Input: 64 Output: 64 = Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16
+ Input: 16 Output: 16

1−9
Overview FP0

1.4 Programming Tools

1.4 Programming Tools

Standard ladder diagram tool software “FPWIN GR Ver.2”
Type of software OS (Operating system) Hard disc capacity Product No.
FPWIN GR Ver.2 Full type Windows 95 (OSR2 or higher) 40 MB or more AFPS10520
English language
English−language Windows 98
menu Upgraded version Windows Me AFPS10520R
Windows
do s NT (Ver.4.0
( e 0 oro higher)
g e)
Small type Windows 2000 AFPS11520
Windows XP

Notes

1) Customers who use the “FPWIN GR Ver.1” can use the “FPWIN
GR Ver.2” after purchasing the upgraded version software.
(The upgrade version software can be installed only when the
“Ver.1.1” has been previously installed)
2) Small type version can be used for the “FP−e,” “FPΣ,” “FP0,”
“FP−X,” “FP1,” and “FP−M” series.

IEC61131−3−compliant programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver.5

Type of software OS (Operating system) Hard disc capacity Product No.
FPWIN GR Ver.5 Full type Windows 95 (OSR2 or higher) 100 MB or more AFPS50550
English−language Windows 98
menu Windows Me
Small type Windows NT (Ver.4.0 or higher) AFPS51550
Windows 2000
Windows XP

Note
Small type version can be used for the “FP−e,” “FPΣ,” “FP0,”
“FP−X,” “FP1,” and “FP−M” series.

Type of computer and suitable cables

Connector Connector on PLC side Product No.
D−Sub 9−pin Mini DIN round 5−pin AFC8503
Mini DIN round 5−pin straight type AFC8503S

1.4.1 Discontinued Products of Programming Tool

The Handy programming unit and connection cables (AFC8521/AFC8523) went out of
production in August, 2006.
The NPST−GR went out of production in August, 2003.

1 − 10
Chapter 2
Control Units

2.1 Parts and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 3

2.1.1 Control Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 4
2.1.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 6
2.1.1.2 Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 6
2.1.1.3 Tool Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 6

2.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7
2.2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7
2.2.1.1 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 7
2.2.1.2 Current Consumed by
the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 8
2.2.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 10
2.2.3 Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 14
2.2.3.1 Limitations on Number of
Simultaneous Input ON Points 2 − 15
2.2.4 Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 16
2.2.4.1 Relay Output Type . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 16
2.2.4.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . 2 − 17

2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 18

2.3.1 Relay Output Type
(C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM/C14RS/
C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 18
2.3.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 19
2.3.2.1 NPN Open Collector Type (C16T/
C16CT/C32T/C32CT/T32CT) . 2 − 19
2.3.2.2 PNP Open Collector Type (C16P/
C16CP/C32P/C32CP/T32CP) . 2 − 21
next page
Optional Memory FP0

2.4 Pin Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 22

2.4.1 C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM . . . . . . 2 − 22
2.4.2 C14RS/C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM . . . . . . 2 − 22
2.4.3 C16T/C16CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 23
2.4.4 C16P/C16CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 24
2.4.5 C32T/C32CT/T32CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 25
2.4.6 C32P/C32CP/T32CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 26

2.5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 − 27

2−2
FP0 Optional Memory

2.1 Parts and Terminology

2.1 Parts and Terminology

There are sixteen different control unit types available:

1. C10RS terminal type
2. C14RS terminal type
3. C10CRS (with RS232C port) terminal type
4. C14CRS (with RS232C port) terminal type
5. C10RM connector type
6. C14RM connector type
7. C10CRM (with RS232C port) connector type
8. C14CRM (with RS232C port) connector type
9. C16T
10. C16P
11. C16CT (with RS232C port)
12. C16CP (with RS232C port)
13. C32T
14. C32P
15. C32CT (with RS232C port)
16. C32CP (with RS232C port)
17. T32CT (with RS232C port)
18. T32CP (with RS232C port)
In the next sections you will find a detailed description of each control unit.

2−3
Optional Memory FP0

2.1 Parts and Terminology

2.1.1 Control Unit Types

C10RS/C14RS C10RM/C14RM All control unit types

C10CRS/C14CRS C10CRM/C14CRM
(terminal type) (connector type) 13

1 7 EXPANSION
14
CONNECTOR

5 11
2 8

6 12

3 9

15
4 10
16

C16T/C16CT C32T/C32CT Control unit with RS232C port

C16P/C16CP C32P/C32CP
T32CT/T32CP

17 23
21 27

18 24

22 28

19 25

20 26
29

2−4
FP0 Optional Memory

2.1 Parts and Terminology

1 7 17 23 Status indicator LEDs

display the operation mode and error statuses (*section 2.1.1.1).
2 8 18 24 Mode switch
changes the operation mode (*section 2.1.1.2).
3 9 19 25 Tool port (RS232C)
is used to connect a programming tool (*section 2.1.1.3).
4 10 20 26 Power supply connector
Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the power supply cable (AFP0581) that comes with the unit.
5 Input terminal (9-pin)
6 Output terminal (9-pin) 7 8 9 10
The input and output terminals ( 5 and 6 ) use a terminal block socket made by Phoenix Contact Co.
(product number: 1840434) (*section 7.6).
11 Input connector (9-pin)
12 Output connector (9-pin)
The input and output connectors ( 11 and 12 ) use a connector made by Molex Japan Co. (product
number: 51067−0900) (*section 7.7).
13 16 Expansion hook
is used to secure expansion units. The hook is also used for installation on FP0 flat type mounting
plate (AFP0804).
14 Expansion connector
connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit (*section 6.1).
15 DIN rail attachment lever 16 17 18 19 20
allows simple attachment to a DIN rail.
The lever is also used for installation on FP0 slim type mounting plate (AFP0803).
21 Input connector (10-pin)
22 Output connector (10-pin) 23 24 25 26
Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors ( 21 and 22 ) (*section 7.8).
27 Input connectors (10-pin × 2)
28 Output connectors (10-pin × 2)
Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors ( 27 and 28 ) (*section 7.8).
29 RS232C port
Use this port to connect to devices with an RS232C port, such as an I.O.P., a bar code reader, or an
image checker, enabling data input and output. (*section 7.9).

2−5
Optional Memory FP0

2.1 Parts and Terminology

2.1.1.1 Status Indicator LEDs

These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error.

LED Description
RUN (green) Illuminates when in the RUN mode and indicates the execution of a program. It flashes during
forced input/output.
PROG. (green) Illuminates when in the PROG. mode and indicates that operation has stopped.
ERROR/ALARM Flashes when an error is detected during the self-diagnostic function. Illuminates if a hard-
(red) ware error occurs, or if operation slows because of the program, and the watchdog timer is
activated.

2.1.1.2 Mode Switch

This switch turns ON and OFF (RUN/PROG.) the operation of the FP0. The FP0 can
also be turned ON and OFF by the programming tool.

Switch position Operation mode

RUN (upward) This sets the RUN mode. The program is executed and operation begins.
PROG. (downward) This sets the PROG. mode.

When performing remote switching from the programming tool, the position of the mode
switch and the actual mode of operation may differ. Verify the mode with the status
indicator LED. Otherwise, restart the FP0 and change the mode of operation with the
mode switch.

2.1.1.3 Tool Port

The tool port is used to connect a programming tool.

Pin assignment
1 2

Pin no. Abbreviation

1 —
2 SD (TXD)
3 SG
3 4 RD (RXD)
5 +5V
5
4

2−6
FP0 Optional Memory

2.2 Specifications

2.2 Specifications

2.2.1 General Specifications

Item Description
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 V to 26.4 V DC
Rated current consumption 300 mA or less (*section 2.2.1.2)
Allowed momen- C10/C14 5 ms at 21.6 V, 10 ms at 24 V
t
tary power off
ff time
ti
C16/C32 10 ms at 21.6 V, 10 ms at 24 V
T32/SL1
Ambient temperature 0 °C to +55 °C/32 °F to +131 °F
Storage temperature −20 °C to +70 °C/−4 °F to +158 °F
Ambient humidity 30 % to 85 % RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 30 % to 85 % RH (non-condensing)
Breakdown voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute between I/O terminal and power supply/ground terminal
1500 V AC for 1 minute between I/O terminal and power supply/ground ter-
minal (relay output type only)
Insulation resistance min. 100 MΩ (measured with a 500 V DC megger)
between I/O terminal and ground terminal
Vibration resistance 10 Hz to 55 Hz, 1 cycle/min: double amplitude of 0.75 mm/ 0.030 in., 10 min on
3 axes
Shock resistance Shock of 98 m/s2 or more, 4 times on 3 axes
Noise immunity 1,000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 µs (based on in-house measure-
ments)
Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust

2.2.1.1 Weight

Type Weight Type Weight

C10 approx. 100 g/3.53 oz SL1 approx. 120 g/4.24 oz
C14 approx. 105 g/3.70 oz A21 approx. 80 g/2.82 oz
C16 approx. 85 g/3.00 oz A80 approx. 90 g/3.18 oz
C32 approx. 115 g/4.06 oz IOL, TC4 approx. 85 g/3.00 oz
T32 approx. 125 g/4.41 oz TC8 approx. 95 g/3.35 oz
E8R/E8YR approx. 90 g/3.17 oz CCLS approx. 80 g/2.82 oz
E8X/E8YT/E8YP approx. 65 g/2.29 oz A04V/A04I approx. 75 g/2.65 oz
E16RS/E16RM approx. 105 g/3.70 oz
E16T/E16P/E16X/E16YT/E16YP approx. 70 g/2.47 oz
E32T/E32P approx. 85 g/3.00 oz

2−7
Optional Memory FP0

2.2 Specifications

2.2.1.2 Current Consumed by the Control Unit

Unit type Control unit Expansion Input circuit Output circuit

(The current unit (The current (The current
consumed by (The current consumed by consumed by
the control consumed by the input the output
unit power the expansion circuits of the circuits of the
supply unit power various units. various units.
connector. If supply The value The value
expansion connector. If a indicates the indicates the
units or unit is not current that current used
intelligent listed below, it flows into the to drive the
units are means that it input circuit. ) output circuit.
added, the has no power The value
current is supply does not
increased by connector.) include the
the value load current
indicated value.)
below. )
FP0 Control unit FP0−C10 100mA or less — 25.8mA or less —
FP0−C14 100mA or less — 34.4mA or less —
FP0−C16 40mA or less — 34.4mA or less 28mA or less
FP0−C32 60mA or less — 68.8mA or less 52mA or less
FP0−T32
S−LINK Control FP0−SL1 150mA or less — — —
unit
FP0 Expansion FP0−E8X 10mA or less — 34.4mA or less —
unit
FP0−E8R 15mA or less 50mA or less 17.2mA or less —
FP0−E8YR 10mA or less 100mA or less — —
FP0−E8YT/P 15mA or less — — 24mA or less
FP0−E16X 20mA or less — 68.8mA or less —
FP0−E16R 20mA or less 100mA or less 34.4mA or less —
FP0−E16T/P 25mA or less — 34.4mA or less 24mA or less
FP0−E16YT/P 25mA or less — — 48mA or less
FP0−E32T/P 40mA or less — 68.8mA or less 48mA or less
FP0 Intelligent FP0−A21 20mA or less 100mA or less — —
unit
FP0−A80 20mA or less 60mA or less — —
FP0−A04V 20mA or less 100mA or less — —
FP0−A04I 20mA or less 130mA or less — —
FP0−TC4, 25mA or less — — —
FP0−TC8
FP0−IOL 30mA or less 40mA or less — —
FP0−CCLS 40mA or less 40mA or less — —
Programmable AIGT0030 80mA or less — — —
display unit AIGT0032
AIGT0130
AIGT0132

2−8
FP0 Optional Memory

2.2 Specifications

Current consumption example

C14RS E32T E16T E16RS

At power supply connector of

expansion I/O unit FP0 E16RS
Type Current consumption
FP0 E16RS 100 mA

At power supply connector of control unit

Type Current consumption
FP0 C14RS 100 mA
FP0 E32T 40 mA
FP0 E16T 25 mA
FP Programmer II Ver. 2
FP0 E16RS 20 mA
FP Programmer II Ver. 2 50 mA
C−NET Adapter S2
Total current consumption 235 mA or less

2−9
Optional Memory FP0

2.2 Specifications

2.2.2 Performance Specifications

Item Relay output type Transistor output type S−LINK

type
C10RS/ C14RS/ C16T/ C32T/ T32C SL1
C10RM/ C14RM/ C16P/ C32P/
C10CRS/ C14CRS/ C16CT/ C32CT/
C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP
Programming method/Control method Relay symbol/Cyclic operation
Controllable I/O Basic unit Total: 10 Total: 14 Total: 16 Total: 32 Total: 32 Max. 128
points Input: 6 Input: 8 Input: 8 Input: 16 Input: 16 Input: 64
Output: 4 Output: 6 Output: 8 Output: 16 Output: 16 Output: 64
at S−LINK
block
With expansion Max. 58 Max. 62 Max. 112 Max. 128 Max. 128 Max. 96 at
unit 1
When config- expansion
ured with same block
output type as
control unit
With expansion Max. 106 Max. 110 Max. 112 Max. 128 Max. 128
unit 2
When relays
and transistors
are mixed
Program memory Built−in memory Built in EEPROM (without battery)
Program capacity 2,720 steps 5,000 10,000 5,000 steps
steps steps
Numbers of Basic 83
i t
instruction
ti High-level 145
Operation speed 0.9µs/step (by basic instruction)
I/O refresh and base time With no expansion board: 0.3ms
With expansion board(s): 0.3ms and (1 x number of expansion boards) ms
Operation Relay Internal relay (R) 1,008 points (R0 to R62F) 1,008 1,008
memory points (R0 points (R0
points to R62F) to R62F)
(* Note 1)
Special internal 64 points (R9000 to R903F)
relay (R)
Timer/Counter 144 points (initial setting is 100 timer points, T0 to T99 / 44 counter points,
(T/C) C100 to C143 (* Note 2))
Timer range: 1ms, 10ms, 100ms, 1s; selected by instruction
Memory Data register 1,660 words (DT0 to DT1659) 6,144 16,384 6,144
area (DT) words words words
(DT0 to (DT0 to (DT0 to
DT6143) DT16383) DT6143)
(* Note 1)
Special data 112 words (DT9000 to DT9111) 112 words 112 words
register (DT) (DT90000 (DT9000
to to
DT90111) DT9111)
Index register 2 words
(IX, IY)
Differential points (DF, DF/) Unlimited of points
Master control relay points (MCR) 32 points
Number of labels (JP and LOOP) 64 labels 255 labels 64 labels

2 − 10
FP0 Optional Memory

2.2 Specifications

Item Relay output type Transistor output type S−LINK

type
C10RS/ C14RS/ C16T/ C32T/ T32C SL1
C10RM/ C14RM/ C16P/ C32P/
C10CRS/ C14CRS/ C16CT/ C32CT/
C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP
Number of step ladders 128 stages 704 stages 128 stages
(* Note 1)
Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100 sub- 16 sub-
routines routines
Number of interrupt programs 7 programs (external 6 points, internal 1 point) 1 program
(internal 1
point)
Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, program syntax check
Clock/calender function Not available Available Not
(* Note 3) available
Special Pulse catch input Total 6 points Not
functions X0 to X1: 50µs available
Interrupt input
X2 to X5: 100µs
RS232C port Baud rate: 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200bit/s
(* Note 4) Transmission distance: 3m/9.84ft.
(Only units with an RS232C Terminal block: 3−pin, made by phoenix Contact Co.
port) (products number: MKDS1/3−3.5)
Communication method: Half−duplex
Periodical interrupt 0.5ms to 30s interval
Constant scan Available
Password Available
High- speed counter Counter mode: Not
function available
Addition/subtraction (one phase) (* Note 7)
(* Note 5)
− Input point number:
Four channels maximum
− Maximum counting speed:
10kHz maximum for all 4 channels
− Input contacts used:
X0: count input (ch 0) X3: count input (ch 2)
X1: count input (ch 1) X4: count input (ch 3)
X2: reset input (*Note 8) X5: reset input (*Note 8)
− Minimum input pulse width:
X0, X1 50µs, <10kHz>
X3, X4 100µs, <5kHz>
Counter mode: Not
Two−phase/individual/direction decision (two−phase) available

− Input point number:

Two channels maximum
− Maximum counting speed:
2kHz maximum for all 2 channels
− Input contacts used:
X0: count input (ch 0) X3: count input (ch 2)
X1: count input (ch 0) X4: count input (ch 2)
X2: reset input X5: reset input
− Minimum input pulse width:
X0, X1 50µs, <10kHz>
X3, X4 100µs, <5kHz>

2 − 11
Optional Memory FP0

2.2 Specifications

Item Relay output type Transistor output type S−LINK

type
C10RS/ C14RS/ C16T/ C32T/ T32C SL1
C10RM/ C14RM/ C16P/ C32P/
C10CRS/ C14CRS/ C16CT/ C32CT/
C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP
Special Pulse Output point Not available Two independent points (Y0 and Not
functions
u c o s output
ou pu number Y1)(no interpolation function) available
f
func- Output Not available 40Hz to 10kHz (Y0/Y1: one−point Not
tion frequency output) available
(* Note 40Hz to 5kHz (Y0/Y1: two−point
6,10) output)
PWM Output point Not available Two points (Y0 and Y1) Not
output
ou pu number available
f
func- Output Not available Frequency: 0.15Hz to Frequen- Not
tion frequency 38Hz, cy: available
(* Note (* Note 9) 0.15Hz to
6) 1KHz
Duty: 0.1% to 99.9%
Duty:
0.1% to
99.9%
Memory Program and system EEPROM
backup register
(* Note 6,
6
12) Operation memory Areas which are held if the power Areas The opera- Areas
supply fails are fixed, and are which are tion which are
retained by the EEPROM. held if the memory is held if the
power backed up power
− Number of points/words of the supply using supply
fixed hold areas in the various fails are built−in fails are
memories fixed, and charge- fixed, and
Counters: 4 points are able (sec- are
Internal relays: 32 points retained ondary ) retained
Date registers: 8 words by the battery, so by the
(* Note 13) EEPROM. the hold EEROM.
− Number type − Number
of points/ memory of points/
words of areas can words of
the fixed be speci- the fixed
hold areas fied using hold areas
in the the pro- in the
various gramming various
memories tools. memories
Counters: (* Note 11) Counters:
16 points 16 points
− Memory
Internal re- areas Internal re-
lays: 128 which can lays: 128
points be speci- points
Date fied: Date
Timers, registers:
registers: Counters, 32 words
32 words Internal re- (* Note
(* Note lays, Data 14)
14) registers
Backup by the F12/F13 Available for all data registers
instruction

Notes

1) Hold or non−hold type can be set using the system registers.

2) The proportion of timer points to counter points can be
changed using a system register 5.

2 − 12
FP0 Optional Memory

2.2 Specifications

Notes

3) Precision of calender timer:

At 0 C/32 F, less than 139 second error per month.
At 25 C/77 F, less than 72 seconds error per month.
At 55 C/131 F, less than 169 seconds error per month.
This accuracy is considered to be the worst fluctuation coefficient
value based on fluctuations in the normal voltage of 5V and the
battery backup voltage of 3V. Also, F157 and F158 (time/date
addition and subtraction instructions) cannot be used.
4) When using the RS232C port for communication, we recommend
using resend processing. The driver IC for the RS232C is in full
conformance with EIA/TIA−232E and CCITT V.28 standards.
5) The combinations 1 phase × 2 channels and 2 phases × 1 channel
are also possible for the high−speed counter.
6) The internal relay, data register, and timer/counter hold areas of the
T32CT control unit (10 k step type) can be changed by the system
registers. The number of points in the table is the value when the
system registers are initial values.
7) The max. counting speed (10kHz) is the counting speed with a rated
input voltage of 24V DC and an ambient temperature of 25°C. The
counting speed (frequency) will decrease depending on the voltage
and temperature.
8) If both reset inputs X0 and X1 are reset, X2 will be the reset input of
X1. In the same way, for X3 and X4, X5 acts as the reset input of X4.
9) With a CPU of Ver. 1.2 or a subsequent version, the frequency will be
0.15Hz to 1kHz.
10) The maximum is 9.5kHz when the positioning control instruction
(F168) is executed.
11) Precautions when using the battery backup function Secondary
(chargeable) battery is used as backup battery in the FP0 T32C
control unit. The battery is not charged before the unit is shipped,
so please make sure that the built−in backup battery have been
charged before using the unit.
12) The program, system resisters and the hold type areas (internal
relay, data register and counter) are backed up by the built in
EEPROM.
13) The possible number of write times by the EEP−ROM write
instruction is 100,000 or less.
14) The possible number of write times by the EEP−ROM write
instruction is 10,000 or less.
15) If the power supply is turned off while the P13 instruction is being
executed, the data written by the P13 instruction may not be written
in the EEPROM properly. Also, the area where the internal relays,
data registers and timer/counter are held may not be held properly.
Do not turn off the power supply while the P13 instruction is being
executed.

2 − 13
Optional Memory FP0

2.2 Specifications

2.2.3 Input Specifications

Item Description
Insulation method optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Rated input current approx. 4.3 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Input points per C10RM, 6 points/common
common (*Note 1) C10CRM,
C10RS,
C10CRS
C14RM, 8 points/common
C14CRM,
C14RS,
C14CRS
C16T, C16CT, 8 points/common
C16P, C16CP
C32T, C32CT, 16 points/common
C32P, C32CP
T32CT,
T32CP
ON voltage/ON current 19.2 V or less/3 mA or less
OFF voltage/OFF current 2.4 V or more/1 mA or more
Response time OFF ↔ ON 50 µs or less (at X0, X1) (* Note 2)
(at 24 V DC and 25 100 µs or less (at X2 to X5) (* Note 2)
°C/66 °F) 2 ms or less (at X6 to XF)
ON ↔ OFF the same as above
Operating mode indicator LED

Notes

1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
2) X0 through X5 are inputs for the high-speed counter and have
a fast response time. If used as normal inputs, we recommend
inserting a timer in the ladder program as chattering and noise
may be interpreted as an input signal.

2 − 14
FP0 Optional Memory

2.2 Specifications

2.2.3.1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the
following range as determined by the temperature.

FP0-C14RM/C14CRM/C14RS/C14CRS
at 24 V DC

Number of 8 at 26.4 V DC
input points
per common
which are 5
simultaneous 3
ON

35/ 45/ 55/

95 113 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

FP0-C16T/C16CT/C16P/C16CP
at 26.4 V DC
Number of 8
at 24 V DC
input points
per common
which are 4
simultaneous
ON

45/ 50/ 55/

113 122 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

FP0-C32T/C32CT/C32P/C32CP/T32CT/T32CP
at 26.4 V DC

Number of 16 at 24 V DC
input points
per common
which are 8
simultaneous 6
ON

23/ 31/ 55/

73.4 87.8 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

2 − 15
Optional Memory FP0

2.2 Specifications

2.2.4 Output Specifications

2.2.4.1 Relay Output Type

FP0 relay output types: C10RM, C10CRM, C10RS, C10CRS, C14RM, C14CRM,
C14RS, C14CRS

Item Description
Output type Normally open (1 Form A) relay output
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC (4.5 A maximum per common)
(at Resistance load)
Output points per C10RM, 2 points/common +1 point/common +1 point/common
common C10CRM,
C10RS,
C10CRS
C14RM, 4 points/common + 1 point/common + 1 point/common
C14CRM,
C14RS,
C14CRS
Response
p time OFF → ON approx. 10 ms
ON → OFF approx. 8 ms
Mechanical life time 20,000,000 operations or more
Electrical life time 100,000 operations or more
Surge absorber None
Operating mode indicator LED

2 − 16
FP0 Optional Memory

2.2 Specifications

2.2.4.2 Transistor Output Type

FP0 transistor output types: C16T, C16CT, C16P, C16CP, C32T, C32CT, C32P,
C32CP, T32CT, T32CP
Item Description
Insulation method optical coupler
Output type open collector
Rated load voltage NPN open collector type: 5 to 24 V DC (* Note)
PNP open collector type: 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range NPN open collector type: 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
PNP open collector type: 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.1 A
Max. surge current 0.3 A
Output points per C16T, C16CT, 8 points/common
common
co o C16P, C16CP
C32T, C32CT, 16 points/common
C32P, C32CP
T32CT,
T32CP
OFF state leakage current 100 µA or less
ON state voltage drop 1.5 V or less
External power Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
supply for driving
internal circuit Current Y0 and Y1: 5 mA/1 point, except Y0 and Y1: 3 mA/1 point
Response
p time OFF → ON 1 ms or less (Y0 and Y1 only: 50 µs or less)
ON → OFF 1 ms or less (Y0 and Y1 only: 50 µs or less)
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED

Note
For NPN open collector type, able to be used with different
voltages for the load voltage and the external power supply for
driving the internal circuit.
External power supply for
driving internal circuit
(+) (21.6 V to 26.4 V DC)
Rated load voltage
Yn (5 V to 24 V DC)
Internal Load
circuit
Ground for load voltage and
(−) for external power supply for
driving internal circuit

2 − 17
Optional Memory FP0

2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

2.3.1 Relay Output Type

(C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM/C14RS/C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM)
FP0-C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM/C14RS/C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM

Input side
5.6 kΩ X0

Internal
(* Note 1)
circuit

5.6 kΩ
Xn

Internal (* Note
circuit 1)

COM

24 V DC (* Note 2)

Output side Y0
Load

Internal
circuit

Yn
Load

Internal
circuit
COM
Power
supply

Notes

1) The resistor in the control unit is 2 kΩ for X0 through X5, and 1

kΩ for X6 and X7.
2) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 18
FP0 Optional Memory

2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

2.3.2 Transistor Output Type

2.3.2.1 NPN Open Collector Type (C16T/C16CT/C32T/C32CT/T32CT)

When the load voltage and external power supply are the same
This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply
for driving internal circuit are the same. In this situation, there is only one power supply.

FP0-C16T/C16CT/C32T/C32CT
Input side
5.6 kΩ
X0

Internal
circuit
(* Note 1)

5.6 kΩ
Xn

(* Note 1)
Internal
24 V DC
circuit
(* Note 2)
COM

Output side (+)

Internal Load
circuit Y0

Yn
Internal Load
circuit

(−)

24 V DC (External power supply and load voltage)

Notes

1) The resistor in the control unit is 2 kΩ for X0 through X5, and 1

kΩ for X6 through XF.
2) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 19
Optional Memory FP0

2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the
driving the internal circuit
Other than 24 V DC load voltage, 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be
connected.
FP0-C16T/C16CT/C32T/C32CT/T32CT
Input side
5.6 kΩ X0

Internal
circuit (* Note 1)

5.6 kΩ X1

Internal (* Note
circuit 1)

5.6 kΩ
Xn

Internal (* Note
24 V DC
circuit 1)
(* Note 2)
COM

Output side
(+)

Internal Y0 Load (for 5 V )

circuit

Internal Y1 Load (for 5 V )

circuit

Internal Yn Load (for 24 V ) 24 V DC

circuit 5V DC (External
(Rated load power supply
voltage) for driving
(−) internal circuit)

Notes

1) The resistor in the control unit is 2 kΩ for X0 through X5, and 1

kΩ for X6 through XF.
2) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 20
FP0 Optional Memory

2.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

2.3.2.2 PNP Open Collector Type (C16P/C16CP/C32P/C32CP/T32CP)

FP0-C16P/C16CP/C32P/C32CP/T32CP

Input side
5.6 kΩ X0

Internal (* Note 1)
circuit

5.6 kΩ Xn

(* Note 1)
Internal 24 V DC
circuit (* Note 2)
COM

Output side (−)

Internal Load
circuit Y0

Yn
Internal Load
circuit
24 V DC
(Load voltage and
(+) external power
supply)

Notes

1) The resistor in the control unit is 2 kΩ for X0 through X5, and 1

kΩ for X6 through XF.
2) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 21
Optional Memory FP0

2.4 Pin Layouts

2.4 Pin Layouts

2.4.1 C10RS/C10CRS/C10RM/C10CRM

Input X0−5 C10RS/C10CRS C10RM/C10CRM

X0
X1
X0−5 X0 X0−5

X2
X3
X4 X5
X5
(NC) COM
(NC)
COM
(* Note) Y0−3
Y0 Y0−3

Output Load
Y0
Y1 Load
Y0−3 (NC)
(NC) Y3
COM Power supply COM
Y2 Load
COM
Y3 Load
COM Power supply

2.4.2 C14RS/C14CRS/C14RM/C14CRM

X0−7
Input X0
C14RS/C14CRS C14RM/C14CRM
X1 X0−7
X0 X0−7

X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
COM
X7
COM
(* Note) Y0
Y0−5
Output Y0 Load
Y1 Load
Y0−5 Y2 Load
Y3 Load Y5
COM Power supply
COM
Y4 Load
COM Power supply
Y5 Load
COM Power supply

Note
Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 22
FP0 Optional Memory

2.4 Pin Layouts

2.4.3 C16T/C16CT

Input
C16T/C16CT
Α X0−7
X0 X1
X2 X3 X0 X1
X4 X5
X6 X7
COM COM
COM COM

Output (* Note 1)
Y0 Y1
Α Y0−7
Load Y0 Y1 Load
Load Y2 Y3 Load (+) (−)
Load Y4 Y5 Load
Load Y6 Y7 Load
(+) (−)

Notes

The two COM terminals of input terminal (X0−7) are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 23
Optional Memory FP0

2.4 Pin Layouts

2.4.4 C16P/C16CP

Input
C16P/C16CP
Α X0−7
X0 X1
X2 X3 X0 X1
X4 X5
X6 X7
COM COM
COM COM

Output (* Note 1)
Y0 Y1
Α Y0−7
Load Y0 Y1 Load
Load Y2 Y3 Load (+) (−)
Load Y4 Y5 Load
Load Y6 Y7 Load
(+) (−)

Notes

The two COM terminals of input terminal (X0−7) are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 24
FP0 Optional Memory

2.4 Pin Layouts

2.4.5 C32T/C32CT/T32CT

Input Input
X0 X1 C32T/C32CT X8 X9

COM COM
(* Note 1)
Output Output Y0 Y1 Y8 Y9

(+) (+) (+) (−) (+) (−)

Notes

The four COM terminals of input terminals (X0−7 and X8−F) are
connected internally, however they should be externally
connected as well.
The (+) terminals of output terminals (Y0−7) and output
terminals (Y8−F) are connected internally, however they
should be externally connected as well.
The (−) terminals of output terminals (Y0−7) and output
terminals (Y8−F) are connected internally, however they
should be externally connected as well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 25
Optional Memory FP0

2.4 Pin Layouts

2.4.6 C32P/C32CP/T32CP

Input Input C32P/C32CP

X0 X1 X8 X9

COM COM
(* Note 1)
Output Output Y0 Y1 Y8 Y9

(+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−)

Notes

The four COM terminals of input terminals (X0−7 and X8−F) are
connected internally, however they should be externally
connected as well.
The (+) terminals of output terminals (Y0−7) and output
terminals (Y8−F) are connected internally, however they
should be externally connected as well.
The (−) terminals of output terminals (Y0−7) and output
terminals (Y8−F) are connected internally, however they
should be externally connected as well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

2 − 26
FP0 Optional Memory

2.5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type

2.5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type

Recharging the internal backup battery
A secondary battery (rechargeable type) is used as the backup battery in the control
unit (10 K step type). When shipped, this battery is not charged; therefore, please make
sure it is sufficiently charged before using. Recharging is automatic when DC power is
supplied.

When backup is possible of operation memory

Relationship between recharging time and backup time
The number of days for the backup time changes with the proportion of recharging time.
Please use the graph below to verify the number of days for the backup time.

Relationship between recharging

time and backup time
B 100 %
a
c 80 % 50day(25 )
k 40day(25 )
u 60 %
p 30 day(25 )
t
i 20 %
m 10 day(25 )
e

0 8 16 24 48 72
Recharging
time (h)

Number of days for backup depending on ambient temperature

The number of days for the backup differs, as shown in the table below, when
recharging is done for 72 hours at a certain ambient temperature.

Ambient temperature Number of days for backup time

70 C Approx. 14 days
25 C Approx. 50 days
−20 C Approx. 25 days

2 − 27
Optional Memory FP0

2.5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type

Predicted life of internal backup battery

When the control unit is on (when power is supplied) the internal backup battery life will
differ depending on the ambient temperature. Refer to the table below to predict the life
of the internal backup battery.

Note: When the control unit is off (when power is not supplied), temperature has almost
no effect on the battery life.

Ambient temperature Internal backup battery life

55 C Approx. 430 days (approx. 1 year)
45 C Approx. 1,200 days (approx. 3 years)
40 C Approx. 2,100 days (approx. 6 years)
35 C Approx. 3,300 days (approx. 9 years)
34 C and less Approx. 10 years

Range of backup possible with the internal backup battery

− The range that the user specifies with the programming tool from among the computation
memories given below, will become the holding backup area.
1) Timer/counter (T/C)
2) Internal relay (R)
3) Data register (DT)
4) Step ladder
− If the user does not make a designation, the default setting range will become the backup
holding area.
− The clock/calendar timer value is also backed up.
− The program and system registers are held in EEP−ROM with no relation to the internal backup
battery.

Handling of the internal backup battery

It is not possible to replace the internal backup battery when it has been exhausted or has
exceeded its life span.

Cautions regarding the backup of data

− The clock/calendar timer value is backed up by the secondary battery.
− Begin use only after the secondary battery has been sufficiently charged.

For reference
To read and use the initial settings data when starting operation, you can also write the data to
EEPROM by using the F12 EEPROM read instruction and the F13 EEPROM write instruction.
If the power supply is turned off while the P13 instruction is being executed, data may not be
written in the EEPROM properly.
Also, the area where the internal relays, data registers and timer/counter are held may not be held
properly.
Do not turn off the power supply while the P13 instruction is being executed.

2 − 28
Chapter 3
Expansion I/O Units

3.1 Parts and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3

3.1.1 Expansion I/O Unit Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 4

3.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.2 Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
3.2.2.1 Limitations on Number of
Simultaneous Input ON Points . . 3 − 7
3.2.3 Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 8
3.2.3.1 Relay Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 8
3.2.3.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . 3 − 9

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 10

3.3.1 Relay Output Type (E8RS/E8RM/E16RS/E16RM)
3 − 10
3.3.2 Transistor Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 11
3.3.2.1 NPN Open Collector Type
(E16T/E32T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 11
3.3.2.2 PNP Open Collector Type
(E16P/E32P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 13
3.3.3 Expansion Input Units (E8X/E16X) . . . . . . . 3 − 14
3.3.4 Expansion Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 15
3.3.4.1 NPN Open Collector Type
(E8YT/E16YT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 15
3.3.4.2 PNP Open Collector Type
(E8YP/E16YP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 17

next page
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 18

3.4.1 E8RS/E8RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 18
3.4.2 E16RS/E16RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 19
3.4.3 E16T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 20
3.4.4 E16P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 21
3.4.5 E32T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 22
3.4.6 E32P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 23
3.4.7 E8X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 24
3.4.8 E16X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 25
3.4.9 E8YT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 26
3.4.10 E8YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 26
3.4.11 E16YT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 27
3.4.12 E16YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 28

3−2
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.1 Parts and Terminology

3.1 Parts and Terminology

There are fourteen different expansion I/O unit types available:

1. E8RS terminal type
2. E16RS terminal type
3. E8RM connector type
4. E16RM connector type
5. E16T
6. E16P
7. E32T
8. E32P
9. E8X input type
10. E16X input type
11. E8YT output type
12. E8YP output type
13. E16YT output type
14. E16YP output type
In the next sections you will find a detailed description of each expansion I/O unit.

3−3
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.1 Parts and Terminology

3.1.1 Expansion I/O Unit Types

E8RS/E16RS E8RM/E16RM
E16T/E16P E32T/E32P
(terminal type) (connector type)

2 5 7 9

3 6 8 10

1 4

E8X E16X E8YT/E8YP E16YT/E16YP

11 12

13 14

All expansion I/O unit types

15

16

17
18

3−4
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.1 Parts and Terminology

1 4 Power supply connector

Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the power supply cable (AFP0581) that comes with the unit.
2 Input terminal (9-pin)
3 Output terminal (9-pin) 4
The input and output terminals ( 2 and 3 ) use a terminal block socket made by Phoenix Contact Co.
(product number: 1840434) (*section 7.6).
5 Input connector (9-pin)
6 Output connector (9-pin)
The input and output connectors ( 5 and 6 ) use a connector made by Molex Japan Co. (product
number: 51067-0900) (*section 7.7).
7 11 Input connector (10-pin)
8 13 Output connector (10-pin)
9 12 Input connector (10-pin × 2)
10 14 Output connector (10-pin × 2) 11 12 13 14
Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors ( 7 to 14 ) (*section 7.8).
15 18 Expansion hook
is used to secure expansion units.
16 Expansion connector
connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the expansion I/O unit (*section 6.1).
17 DIN rail attachment lever 18
allows simple attachment to a DIN rail.
The lever is also used for installation on FP0 slim type mounting plate (AFP0803).

3−5
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.2 Specifications

3.2 Specifications

3.2.1 General Specifications

For more details on the general specifications, refer to section 2.2.1.

3.2.2 Input Specifications

Item Description
Insulation method optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Rated input current approx. 4.3 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Input points E8RS, 4 points/common
pe co
per commono E8RM
(* Note) E16RS, 8 points/common
E16RM,
E16T, E16P,
E8X
E32T, E32P, 16 points/common
E16X
ON voltage/ON current 19.2 V or less/3 mA or less
OFF voltage/OFF current 2.4 V or more/1 mA or more
Response time OFF ↔ ON 2 ms or less
(at 24 V DC and
25 °C/66 °F) ON ↔ OFF the same as above
Operating mode indicator LED

Note
Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.

3−6
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.2 Specifications

3.2.2.1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the
following range as determined by the temperature.

FP0-E16RS/E16RM at 24 V DC

Number of 8 at 26.4 V DC
input points
per common 6
which are
simultaneous
ON

47/ 55/
116.6 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

FP0-E16T/E16P/E8X at 26.4 V DC

Number of 8
input points at 24 V DC
per common
which are 5
simultaneous 4
ON

34/ 43/ 55/

93.2 109.4 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

FP0-E32T/E32P/E16X
at 26.4 V DC
Number of 16
input points at 24 V DC
per common
which are 9
simultaneous 8
ON

26/ 34/ 55/

78.8 93.2 131
Ambient temperature (°C/°F)

3−7
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.2 Specifications

3.2.3 Output Specifications

3.2.3.1 Relay Output Type

FP0 relay output types: E8RS, E8RM, E16RS, and E16RM

Item Description
Output type Normally open (1 Form A) relay output
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC (4.5 A maximum per common)
(at Resistance load)
Output points E8RS, 4 points/common
pe co o
per common E8RM
E16RS, 8 points/common
E16RM
Response
p time OFF ↔ ON approx. 10 ms
ON ↔ OFF approx. 8 ms
Mechanical life time 20,000,000 operations or more
Electrical life time 100,000 operations or more
Surge absorber None
Operating mode indicator LED

3−8
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.2 Specifications

3.2.3.2 Transistor Output Type

FP0 transistor output types: E16T, E16P, E32T, E32P, E8YT, E8YP, E16YT, E16YP
Item Description
Insulation method optical coupler
Output type open collector
Rated load voltage NPN open collector type: 5 to 24 V DC (* Note)
PNP open collector type: 24 V DC
Operating load voltage NPN open collector type: 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
range PNP open collector type: 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.1 A
Max. surge current 0.3 A
Output points E16T, 8 points/common
per common E16P,
E8YT,
E8YP
E32T, 16 points/common
E32P,
E16YT,
E16YP
OFF state leakage current 100 µA or less
ON state voltage drop 1.5 V or less
External power Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
supply for
driving internal Current Y0 and Y1: 5 mA/1 point, except Y0 and Y1: 3 mA/1 point
circuit
Response
p time OFF → ON 1 ms or less (Y0 and Y1 only: 50 µs or less)
ON → OFF 1 ms or less (Y0 and Y1 only: 50 µs or less)
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED

Note
For NPN open collector type, able to be used with different
voltages for the load voltage and the external power supply for
driving the internal circuit.
External power supply for
driving internal circuit
(+) (21.6 V to 26.4 V DC)
Rated load voltage
Yn (5 V to 24 V DC)
Internal Load
circuit
Ground for load voltage and
(−) for external power supply for
driving internal circuit

3−9
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3.1 Relay Output Type (E8RS/E8RM/E16RS/E16RM)

FP0-E8RS/E8RM/E16RS/E16RM
Input side
5.6 kΩ X20

Internal
1 kΩ
circuit

5.6 kΩ
X2n

Internal 1 kΩ
circuit
COM

24 V DC (* Note)

Output side Y20

Load

Internal
circuit

Y2n
Load

Internal
circuit
COM
Power
supply

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 10
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3.2 Transistor Output Type

3.3.2.1 NPN Open Collector Type (E16T/E32T)

When the load voltage and external power supply are the same
This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply
for driving internal circuit are the same. In this situation, there is only one power supply.

FP0-E16T/E32T
Input side
5.6 kΩ
X20

Internal 1 kΩ
circuit

5.6 kΩ X2n

Internal 1 kΩ
circuit 24 V DC
COM (* Note)

Output side (+)

Internal Y20
Load
circuit

Y2n
Internal Load
circuit

(−)

24 V DC (External power supply and load voltage)

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 11
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the
driving the internal circuit
Other than 24 V DC load voltage, 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be
connected.
FP0-E16T/E32T

5.6 kΩ X20

Internal
1 kΩ
circuit

5.6 kΩ X21

Internal
1 kΩ
circuit

5.6 kΩ
X2n

Internal 1 kΩ 24 V DC
circuit
(* Note)
COM

(+)

Internal Y20 Load (for 5 V )

circuit

Internal Y21 Load (for 5 V )

circuit

Internal Y2n Load (for 24 V ) 24 V DC

circuit 5V DC (External
(Rated load power supply
voltage) for driving
(−) internal circuit)

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 12
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3.2.2 PNP Open Collector Type (E16P/E32P)

FP0-E16P/E32P
Input side
5.6 kΩ X20

Internal
1 kΩ
circuit

5.6 kΩ X2n

Internal 24 V DC
1 kΩ
circuit (* Note)
COM

Output side (−)

Internal Y20
Load
circuit

Y2n
Internal Load
circuit
24 V DC
(+)

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 13
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3.3 Expansion Input Units (E8X/E16X)

FP0-E8X/E16X
Input side
5.6 kΩ
X20

Internal 1 kΩ
circuit

5.6 kΩ X2n

Internal 1 kΩ
circuit
COM

24 V DC (* Note)

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The input number given above is the input number when the
expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 14
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3.4 Expansion Output Units

3.3.4.1 NPN Open Collector Type (E8YT/E16YT)

When the load voltage and external power supply are the same
This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply
for driving the internal circuit are the same. In this situation, there is only one power
supply.
FP0-E8YT/E16YT

Output side (+)

Internal Y20
Load
circuit

Y2n
Internal Load
circuit

(−)

24 V DC
(External power supply
and load voltage)

Note
The output number given above is the output number when the
expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 15
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the
driving the internal circuit
Other than 24 V DC load voltage, 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be
connected.
FP0-E8YT/E16YT

Output side (+)

Y20
Load (for 5 V )
Internal circuit

Y21
Load (for 5 V )
Internal circuit

Y2n Load (for 24 V DC)

Internal circuit
5V DC 24 V DC
(Rated load (External
(−) voltage) power supply
for driving
internal circuit)

Note
The output number given above is the output number when the
expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 16
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.3 Internal Circuit Diagram

3.3.4.2 PNP Open Collector Type (E8YP/E16YP)

FP0-E8YP/E16YP

Output side (−)

Internal Y20
Load
circuit

Y2F
Internal Load
circuit

24 V DC
(+)

Note
The output number given above is the output number when the
expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit
(*section 5.3).

3 − 17
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.1 E8RS/E8RM

Input E8RS E8RM

X20 X0−3
X20 X0−3

X21
X22 X23
X23
(NC)
(NC) COM
(NC)
(NC)
COM Y0−3
Y20 Y0−3

(* Note)
Y23
Output
Y20 Load
Y21 Load COM
Y22 Load
Y23 Load
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
Power
COM supply

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The I/O numbers for the expansion I/O units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 18
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.2 E16RS/E16RM

Input E16RS E16RM

X20 X20
X21
X22
X23
X24 X27
X25 COM
X26
X27
COM Y20
(* Note)

Output
Y20 Load Y27
Y21 Load COM
Y22 Load
Y23 Load
Y24 Load
Y25 Load
Y26 Load
Y27 Load
COM Power
supply

Notes

Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input

voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The I/O numbers for the expansion I/O units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 19
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.3 E16T

Input
E16T

X20 X21
X22 X23 X20 X21
X24 X25
X26 X27
COM COM COM COM

Output (* Note 1)
Y20 Y21

Load Y20 Y21 Load

Load Y22 Y23 Load (+) (−)
Load Y24 Y25 Load
Load Y26 Y27 Load
(+) (−)

Notes

The two COM terminals of input terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The I/O numbers for the expansion I/O units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 20
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.4 E16P

Input
E16P

X20 X21
X22 X23 X20 X21
X24 X25
X26 X27
COM COM COM COM
(* Note 1)
Output
Y20 Y21

Load Y20 Y21 Load

Load Y22 Y23 Load (+) (−)
Load Y24 Y25 Load
Load Y26 Y27 Load
(+) (−)

Notes

The two COM terminals of input terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The I/O numbers for the expansion I/O units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 21
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.5 E32T

Input Input
X20 X21 E32T X28 X29
X20 X21 X28 X29
X22 X23 X2A X2B
X24 X25 X2C X2D
X26 X27 X2E X2F
COM COM COM COM
COM COM
(* Note 1)
Output Output Y20 Y21 Y28 Y29

Y20 Y21 Y28 Y29

Y22 Y23 Y2A Y2B
Y24 Y25 Y2C Y2D
Y26 Y27 Y2E Y2F
(+) (+) (+) (−) (+) (−)

Notes

The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The two (+) terminals of output terminals are connected
internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The two (−) terminals of the output terminals are connected
internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The I/O numbers for the expansion I/O units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 22
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.6 E32P

Input Input E32P

X20 X21 X28 X29
X20 X21 X28 X29
X22 X23 X2A X2B
X24 X25 X2C X2D
X26 X27 X2E X2F
COM COM COM COM
COM COM
(* Note 1)
Output Output Y20 Y21 Y28 Y29

Y20 Y21 Y28 Y29

Y22 Y23 Y2A Y2B
Y24 Y25 Y2C Y2D
Y26 Y27 Y2E Y2F
(+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−)

Notes

The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The two (+) terminals of output terminals are connected
internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The two (−) terminals of the output terminals are internally
connected, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.
The I/O number given above is the I/O number when the
expansion I/O unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The I/O numbers for the expansion I/O units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 23
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.7 E8X

E8X X21
Input X20

X20 X21
X22 X23
X24 X25
X26 X27 COM COM
COM COM

(* Note 1)

Notes

The two COM terminals of input terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.
The input number given above is the input number when the
expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The input numbers for the expansion input units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 24
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.8 E16X

E16X
Input X20 X21 X28 X29

X20 X21 X28 X29

X22 X23 X2A X2B
X24 X25 X2C X2D
X26 X27 X2E X2F
COM COM COM COM COM COM
(* Note 1)

Notes

The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
1) Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
voltage supply.
The input number given above is the input number when the
expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit.
The input numbers for the expansion input units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 25
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.9 E8YT

E8YT

Output

Load Y20 Y21 Load Y20 Y21

Load Y22 Y23 Load
Load Y24 Y25 Load
Load Y26 Y27 Load
(+) (−)
(+) (−)

3.4.10 E8YP

E8YP

Output

Load Y20 Y21 Load Y20 Y21

Load Y22 Y23 Load
Load Y24 Y25 Load
Load Y26 Y27 Load
(+) (−)
(+) (−)

Note
The output number given above is the output number when the
expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit. The
output numbers for the expansion output units will differ
depending on the location where they are installed (*section 5.3).

3 − 26
FP0 Expansion I/O Units

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.11 E16YT

E16YT

Output Output

Y20 Y21 Y28 Y29

Load Y20 Y21 Load Load Y28 Y29 Load
Load Y22 Y23 Load Load Y2A Y2B Load
Load Y24 Y25 Load Load Y2C Y2D Load
Load Y26 Y27 Load Load Y2E Y2F Load
(+) (−) (+) (−) (+) (−)

Notes

The two (+) terminals of the output terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The two (−) terminals of the output terminals are connected
internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The output number given above is the output number when
the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion
unit. The output numbers for the expansion output units will
differ depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 27
Expansion I/O Units FP0

3.4 Pin Layouts

3.4.12 E16YP

E16YP

Output Output
Y20 Y21 Y28 Y29
Load Y20 Y21 Load Load Y28 Y29 Load
Load Y22 Y23 Load Load Y2A Y2B Load
Load Y24 Y25 Load Load Y2C Y2D Load
Load Y26 Y27 Load Load Y2E Y2F Load (+) (−)
(+) (−) (+) (−)

Notes

The two (+) terminals of the output terminals are connected

internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The two (−) terminals of the output terminals are connected
internally, however they should be externally connected as
well.
The output number given above is the output number when
the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion
unit. The output numbers for the expansion output units will
differ depending on the location where they are installed
(*section 5.3).

3 − 28
Chapter 4
S−LINK Control Unit

4.1 Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 3

4.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 5
4.2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 5
4.2.2 S−LINK Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 6

4.3 Wiring the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7

4.3.1 Wiring to Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7
4.3.2 Wiring to S−LINK Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 7

4.4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 9

4.5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On . . . . . . 4 − 10

4.6 S−LINK System Address Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11

4.6.1 Recognizing the Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 11
4.6.2 Address Setting of S−LINK I/O Device . . . . 4 − 12

4.7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 13

4.8 Judging Errors Address Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 14

S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4−2
FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

4.1 Names and Functions

4.1 Names and Functions

1 4

2 5

8
10

1 Status indicator LED

The LED display the operation mode and error statuses.
2 ERROR ADDRESS display (2−digit hexadecimal display)
The address at which the S−LINK system error occurred is displayed.
3 Mode switch
The mode switch changes the operation mode.
4 Transmission indicator (SEND)
This flashes when input or output data is transmitted between the various units of
the S−LINK system.
5 ERROR indicators
These light if an error occurs in the S−LINK system.
ERR1 (Error 1): Short circuit between D − G line.
ERR2: Unused
ERR3 (Error 3): Abnormal voltage level between D − G line.
ERR4 (Error 4): Broken wire or S−LINK I/O device error
6 System SET button
Pressing the system SET button reads the connection status for the S−LINK
system and stores it in the memory. In subsequent operation, the S−LINK unit
checks for errors using the connection status registered at this time.
The output unit data effective at the time that the system SET button was pressed
is retained.

next page

4−3
S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4.1 Names and Functions

7 S−LINK terminal block (6−pin)

The power supply and signal wires of the S−LINK system are connected to the
S−LINK terminal block.
The S−LINK terminal block can be detached from the FP0 S−LINK control unit for
wiring operations.
For detailed information, refer to section “4.3.2 Wiring to S−LINK Terminal Block.”
8 Tool port (RS232C)
The tool port (RS232C) is used to connect a programming tool.
9 Power supply connector
Supply 24V DC to the power supply connector. It is connected using the power
supply cable (AFP0581) that comes with the unit.
10 RS232C port
Use this port to connect to devices with an RS232C port, such as an I.O.P., a bar
code reader, or an image checker, enabling data input and output.

Tool port (RS232C) specifications

Pin assignment
1 2

Pin no. Abbreviation

1 —
2 SD (TXD)
3 SG
3 4 RD (RXD)
5 +5V
5
4

Settings when shipped from the factory

Default value Baud rate: 9600bps
Character bit: 8bits
Parity check: Odd
Stop bit: 1bit

4−4
FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

4.2 Specifications

4.2 Specifications

4.2.1 General Specifications

Item Description
Rated operating voltage 24V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6V to 26.4V DC
Rated current consumption 150mA or less
Allowed momentary power off time 10ms at 21.6V, 10ms at 24V
Ambient temperature 0°C to +55°C/32°F to +131°F
Storage temperature −20°C to +70°C/−4°F to +158°F
Ambient humidity 30% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 30% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Breakdown voltage 500V AC for 1 minute between S−LINK terminal block and power supply/
ground terminals
Insulation resistance min. 100MΩ (measured with a 500V DC megger)
between S−LINK terminal block and power supply/ground terminals
Vibration resistance 10Hz to 55Hz, 1 cycle/min: double amplitude of 0.75mm/ 0.030in., 10 min on
3 axes
Shock resistance Shock of 98m/s2 or more, 4 times on 3 axes
Noise immunity 1,000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50ns and 1µs (based on in-house measure-
ments)
Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust

4−5
S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4.2 Specifications

4.2.2 S−LINK Controller Specifications

Item Description
Rated power supply voltage 24V DC +/−10% / Allowable ripple p − p +/−10% max.
max
(Supplied from IN − 24V
24V, IN − 0V of the S−LINK
S LINK terminal block)
Current consumption [S LINK controller current consumption (including D − G line current consumption)]
[S−LINK
(* note 1) 24V DC 1.6A max.
[Maximum current which can be supplied (supplied to S−LINK unit and I/O devices
from 24V − 0V line)] + 24V DC 5A (fuse: 5A)
Transmission method Bi−directional time−divided multiple signal transmission
Synchronization method Bit synchronization, frame synchronization
Transmission protocol S−LINK protocol
Transmission speed 28.5kbps
Transmission delay time Max. 10.7ms
Transmission distance Main signal wire: up to a distance to 200m max.
max (400m when a booster is used)
FAN−out (* note 2) 320
Connection method ‘T’−branch multi−drop wiring
(* note 3)
No. of input/output points 64 points input/64 points output Fixed
Display Transmission Green LED blinks in response to synchronization signals
indicators display (SEND)
Error indicator Red LED light up depending on the error
Error address If the system error occurs, the error address is displayed using the red 7−segment
display LED.

Notes

1) For detailed information on current consumption, refer to

“Determining the Power Supply” in the “S−LINK Design
Manual.”
2) The output capacitance for the D−G line of the S−LINK
controller and booster is indicated by FAN−out, and the input
capacitance from the D−G line of the S−LINK configuration
unit is indicated by FAN−in. When configuring the S−LINK
system, the configuration should be set up so that the
FAN−out total > or = the FAN−in total. (For detailed information
on calculating the FAN−in value and other values, see the
“S−LINK Design Manual.”
3) The FP0 S−LINK control unit does not have a loop wiring
function.

4−6
FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

4.3 Wiring the Power Supply

4.3 Wiring the Power Supply

With the FP0 S−LINK control unit, power must be supplied at two locations (power
supply connector and S−LINK terminal block).

4.3.1 Wiring to Power Supply Connector

This is the power supply for the programmable controller section and the S−LINK
controller in the S−LINK control unit (24V DC, 150mA).

Power
supply
cable

4.3.2 Wiring to S−LINK Terminal Block

This is the power supply for the S−LINK controller in the S−LINK control unit and other
S−LINK input/output devices to which power is supplied through the 24V − 0V line of
the S−LINK main cable.
The current consumption for the overall S−LINK system is calculated by referring to the
section entitled “Determining the Power Supply” in the “S−LINK Design Manual.” (For
standard purposes, a power supply exceeding 24V DC, 1.6 A should be selected.)
Supply of power to S−LINK terminal block

Supplied to S−LINK
input/output devices

Brown
Blue
White
+24V Black
0V

From external
power supply

next page

4−7
S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4.3 Wiring the Power Supply

S−LINK terminal block: MC1.5/6−ST−3.5 (Made by Phoenix Contact Co.)

Terminal name Color of connecting cable Description
24V Brown Main wire (for S−LINK I/O devices)
0V Blue
D White
G Black
IN−24V — External power supply input for S−LINK
IN−0V —

Suitable wires (twisted wire)

Size AWG#20 to 16
Normal cross−section surface area 0.5 to 1.25mm2

Notes

The S−LINK section is protected by a fuse, but if too many

input/output devices are connected, or if the current
consumption is heavy enough to cause the fuse to blow, we
recommend providing a local power supply.
A short−circuit between D−G, or between D−24V, triggers the
protective circuit, but there is no protection against
short−circuiting between G−24V or 0V−24V. Be aware that a
short−circuit can cause a breakdown or malfunction.

4−8
FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

4.4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies

4.4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies

When turning on the power supplies to the S−LINK control unit, follow the sequence
outlined below.
Procedure:
1. Turn on the power supply to the S−LINK I/O devices connected to the
S−LINK system.
2. Turn on the external power supply to the S−LINK.
3. Last, turn on the power supply to the S−LINK control unit itself.

1. Power supply of S−LINK I/O devices: on

2. External power supply for S−LINK: on

3. Power supply of S−LINK control unit: on

If using the power supply of booster, start up the booster before the external power
supply for S−LINK.
When turning off the power supplies, reverse the order of the sequence noted above.

4−9
S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4.5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On

4.5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On

Refreshing S−LINK I/O data
With the S−LINK control unit, I/O data is refreshed by the CPUs of both the FP0 section
and the S−LINK section, through the memory shared between them.
S−LINK control unit

I/O data
area
refreshed Shared
memory

FP0 S−LINK
section section
CPU CPU

I/O data refreshed

The illustration below shows the time required until the first refreshing is completed by
the S−LINK control unit after the power supply has been turned on. (The external power
supply for the S−LINK is already on.)
Power supply of S−LINK
control unit turned on

S−LINK section 2.6 seconds

I/O data
refreshed

FP0 section
I/O data area 0.07 seconds
refreshed

When the power supply to the S−LINK control unit is turned on, it takes approximately
2.6 seconds for the S−LINK I/O data to be verified by the FP0 section. Be particularly
careful with regard to the FP0 sequence program, if using the S−LINK input at the b
contact relay when the power supply is turned on.

4 − 10
FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

4.6 S−LINK System Address Recognition

4.6 S−LINK System Address Recognition

4.6.1 Recognizing the Address

Before the S−LINK system is being operated for the first time, turn on the power supply
and then press the system SET button.
When the system SET button is pressed, the number of connected devices recognized
by S−LINK control unit blinks on the error address display in hexadecimal.

ERROR ADDRESS display

(Displaying in hexadecimal)

System SET button

If the actual number of connected devices differs from the number displayed, since an
unrecognized S−LINK device exists, check for address overlapping, improper
connection, etc..
Subsequently, an error check is carried out based on this status. When an address is
recognized, that status is stored in the EEPROM, so it is not necessary to press the
system SET button after that point (each time the power supply is turned on).
When the power supply is switched on for the first time after completing the S−LINK
system wiring, an arbitrary error display may appear. This does not indicate any
abnormal operation. If the system SET button is pressed, this display is erased.
If an error address is displayed during operation, confirm the address, and then turn off
the power supply, correct the address at the location where the error occurred, and turn
the power supply on again. Check to make sure the error address display has
disappeared. (Do not press the system SET button in this case.)
If the system SET button is pressed after an error has occurred and before it is canceled,
the error will be canceled. If the cause of the error has not been corrected at that point,
however, be aware that the I/O device for that address will be skipped during any
subsequent checks.

Note
If the system SET button is pressed without recovery having
been made, that status will be recognized for that address, and
any locations where recovery has not been made will not be
recognized.

4 − 11
S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4.6 S−LINK System Address Recognition

4.6.2 Address Setting of S−LINK I/O Device

Addresses can be set freely, regardless of the position of the I/O device connected to
the system, but problems in the wiring of the main cable, such as broken or
disconnected wires, can be detected more easily if I/O devices closer to the S−LINK
control unit are given smaller addresses, and addresses increase in sequential order
for I/O devices which are farther away from the S−LINK control unit.

S−LINK Numeric values indicate the initial address for each I/O
10 20 30 40
control unit device.

80 70 60 50

Up to two I/O devices can be assigned the same address within the system for any
individual S−LINK control unit. Do not set the same address for three or more I/O
devices.
Up to seven boosters can be connected to one system for any individual S−LINK control
unit, but the actual number which can be connected varies depending on the units
configuring the system and the wiring length.

Note
The FP0 S−LINK control unit does not have a loop wiring
function.

4 − 12
FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

4.7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators

4.7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators

If an error occurs in the S−LINK system, the ERROR indicator indicated in the table
below lights, depending on the content of the error.
ERROR indicators Description Steps to take
ERR1 ERR2 ERR3 ERR4
on off on off Short−circuit between D−G If the ERR1 or ERR3 indicator lights, output of
note 1 the signal being transmitted stops, and none
of the S−LINK devices connected to the sys-
tem will operate.
Also, if a short−circuit occurs at a location far
away, there may be times when ERR1 does
not light.
Check the S−LINK signal/power line.
off off on off Error in level of signal being There is a possibility that the wiring length, the
transmitted configuration, or the number of configuration
devices connected to the system exceeds the
rated limit. Check the system configuration
once again.
off off off on Address has been changed/ Check to see if the S−LINK signal/power line
D or G line is broken or dis- is broken or disconnected, or if the address is
connected/ incorrect.
Error in S−LINK unit for dis- In this case, transmission signals are being
played address note 2 output, so the S−LINK input/output devices
operate normally.

Notes

1) This ERROR indicator lights even if the external power supply

to the S−LINK has not been turned on, but this does not
indicate a breakdown in the S−LINK control unit itself. Check
the external power supply to the S−LINK.
2) ERR4 is held, so to cancel it, one of the following is required:
turn the power supply to the FP0 off and then on again, press
the system SET button and enter the settings again, or turn
the power supply on the S−LINK side off and then on again.

4 − 13
S−LINK Control Unit FP0

4.8 Judging Errors Address Displays

4.8 Judging Errors Address Displays

The transmission line is monitored at all times, and if an error occurs, the address at
which the error occurred is displayed as a hexadecimal value.

ERROR ERROR indicator

ADDRESS
display

During normal transmission:

The “ ” shaped charactor rotates in the clockwise direction.

If an error occurs:
The address is displayed. In case faults occur at several locations, the smallest error
address is displayed and the decimal points light up simultaneously.
S−LINK
control unit

10 20 30 40

80 70 60 50 Broken wire
Decimal points
light up <Multiple broken wires>
32(hexadecimal) = 50 (decimal)

4 − 14
Chapter 5
I/O Allocation

5.1 I/O Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3

5.2 Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 4

5.3 Expansion I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 5

I/O Allocation FP0

5−2
FP0 I/O Allocation

5.1 I/O Number

5.1 I/O Number

Expression of numbers for input/output relays
Since input relay (X) and output relay (Y) are handled in units of 16 points, they are
expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.

<Example> External input relay (X)

X0, X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XF
Decimal X10, X11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X1F
1, 2, 3 . . . . . . X20, X21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X2F

Hexadecimal
0, 1, 2, 3 . . . . . A,B . . . . F

Specifying X and Y numbers

On the FP0, the same numbers are used for input and output.
Example: The same number “X20 and Y20” can be used for input and output

5−3
I/O Allocation FP0

5.2 Control Unit

5.2 Control Unit

The I/O allocation of the FP0 control unit is fixed.

Type I/O number

C10RS,, C10CRS,, C10RM,, C10CRM Input: 6 points X0 to X5
Output: 4 points Y0 to Y3
C14RS,, C14CRS,, C14RM,, C14CRM Input: 8 points X0 to X7
Output: 6 points Y0 to Y5
C16T,, C16CT,, C16P,, C16CP Input: 8 points X0 to X7
Output: 8 points Y0 to Y7
C32T,, C32CT,, C32P,, C32CP , T32CT,, T32CP Input: 16 points X0 to XF
Output: 16 points Y0 to YF

S−LINK Control Unit

The I/O allocation of the S−LINK control unit is fixed.

Unit FP0 I/O S−LINK address

Input:
p 64 p
points X80 to X8F 0 to 15
X90 to X9F 16 to 31
X100 to X10F 32 to 47
X110 to X11F 48 to 63
Output:
p 64 p
points Y80 to Y8F 64 to 79
Y90 to Y9F 80 to 95
Y100 to Y10F 96 to 111
Y110 to Y11F 112 to 127

5−4
FP0 I/O Allocation

5.3 Expansion I/O Unit

5.3 Expansion I/O Unit

Up to three expansion I/O units can be added.

I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O
allocation is performed automatically by
the FP0 control unit when an expansion
I/O unit is added.
The I/O allocation of expansion I/O unit
is determined by the installation location.
Third expansion
Second expansion
First expansion
Control unit

I/O number
Type Second
First expansion Third expansion
expansion
E8RS/E8RM
/ Input: 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63
Output: 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63
E8X Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
E8YT/E8YP Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E16RS/E16RM/
/ / Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
E16T/E16P
Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E16X Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
E16YT/E16YP Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
E32T/E32P
/ Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
A21 Input channel 0: 16 WX2 WX4 WX6
points (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
Input channel 1: 16 WX3 WX5 WX7
points (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
Output: 16 points WY2 (Y20 to Y2F) WY4 (Y40 to Y4F) WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)
A80, Input CH0, 2, 4, 6: 16 WX2 WX4 WX6
TC4,
C , points (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
TC8
Input CH1, 3, 5, 7: 16 WX3 WX5 WX7
points (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
A04V,, A04I Input: 16 points WX2 (X20 to X2F) WX4 (X40 to X4F) WX6 (X60 to X6F)
Output CH0, 2, 4, 6: 16 WY2 WY4 WY6
points (Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
Output CH1, 3, 5, 7: 16 WY3 WY5 WY7
points (Y30 to Y3F) (Y50 to Y5F) (Y70 to Y7F)
IOL Input: 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F
Output: 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F

− The channel data of FP0−A80, TC4, TC8, A04V and A04I will switch and be read or
written by a user program that contains the conversion data switch flag.
− Please verify with the manual for the FP0 CC−Link Slave unit.

5−5
I/O Allocation FP0

5.3 Expansion I/O Unit

5−6
Chapter 6
Installation

6.1 Adding Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 3

6.2 Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 5

6.3 Attachment to DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 8

6.4 Installation Using FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate . . . . 6 − 9

6.5 Installation Using FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate . . . 6 − 10

Installation FP0

6−2
FP0 Installation

6.1 Adding Expansion Units

6.1 Adding Expansion Units

Expansion method
1. Peel the seal on the side of the unit so that the internal
connector is exposed.

Seal

Notes

When peeling the seal on the side of the initial lot products,
the shaded part is exposed. Cut off the shaded part with a pair
of nippers or similar tool so that the internal connector is
exposed.

Shaded part

Cut here.

When removing the shaded part, use a sharp cutting object,

making sure that the shaded part is removed leaving a
smooth surface. Note that failure to remove the shaded part
completely can result in damage to the connector.

next page

6−3
Installation FP0

6.1 Adding Expansion Units

2. Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of

the unit with a screwdriver.
Expansion hook

3. Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit
and expansion unit, and insert the pins into the holes so that
there is no gap between the units.

Control unit
Expansion unit

4. Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 2 to secure

the unit.

6−4
FP0 Installation

6.2 Important Notes

6.2 Important Notes

Please, read the following notes carefully before the installation of your FP0.

Notes

Avoid installing the unit in the following locations:

− Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0°C to 55°C/32°F
to 131°F
− Ambient humidity outside the range of 30% to 85% RH
− Sudden temperature changes causing condensation
− Inflammable or corrosive gases
− Excessive airborne dust or metal particles
− Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or
strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda
− Excessive vibration or shock
− Direct sunlight
− Water in any form including spray or mist
Avoid noise interference from the following items:
− Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage
equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio
transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate
high switching surges
− If noise occurs in the power supply line even after the
above countermeasures are taken, it is recommended to
supply power through an insolated transformer, noise filter,
or like.

next page

6−5
Installation FP0

6.2 Important Notes

Measures regarding heat discharge

− Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing
outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of
heat.

Tool port

− Do not install the FP0 control unit as shown below.

Upside-down I/O connectors or I/O terminals on top

Installation which Installations such that the I/O

blocks the air duct connectors or I/O terminals face down

Horizontal installation of the unit

− Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat
such as heaters, transformers or large scale resistors.
next page

6−6
FP0 Installation

6.2 Important Notes

Installation space
− Leave at least 50 mm/1.97 in. of space between the wiring
ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation
and unit replacement.

50 mm/1.97 in. or more

FP0

50 mm/1.97 in. or more

− Maintain a minimum of 100 mm/3.937 in. between devices to

avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a
device or panel door to the front of the FP0 unit.
100mm/3.937 in.
or more

Other device or panel door

FP0

− Keep the first 100 mm/3.937 in. from the front surface of the
FP0 control unit open in order to allow room for
programming tool connections and wiring.

6−7
Installation FP0

6.3 Attachment to DIN Rails

6.3 Attachment to DIN Rails

The FP0 unit enables one-touch attachment to DIN rails.

Procedure:
1. Fit the upper hook of the FP0 unit onto the DIN rail.
2. Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower
hook to fit the FP0 unit into position.

1
Mounting panel
FP0 unit
DIN rail
2

You can easily remove the FP0 unit as described below.

Procedure:
1. Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail
attachment lever.
2. Pull the attachment lever downwards.
3. Lift up the FP0 unit and remove it from the rail.

FP0 unit

DIN rail
3

DIN rail attachment

lever

1 2

Slotted screwdriver

6−8
FP0 Installation

6.4 Installation Using FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate

6.4 Installation Using FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate

Use M4 size pan−head screws for attachment of FP0 slim type mounting plate
(AFP0803) to mounting panel. For a diagram showing detailed dimensions of the FP0
slim type mounting plate, see *section 13.4.

FP0 slim type

mounting plate
Screw
Mounting panel
60.mm/2.362in.

Screw
6.0 mm/0.236 in.

Procedure:
1. Fit the upper hook of the FP0 unit onto the FP0 slim
type mounting plate.
2. Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower
hook to fit the FP0 unit into position.

1
FP0 slim type
mounting plate
FP0 unit

When using an expansion unit, tighten the screws after joining all of the FP0 slim type
mounting plate to be connected. Tighten the screws at each of the four corners.
Example: Two expansion units
FP0 slim type mounting plate

Dia. 5.0/0.197

Dia. 5.0/0.197
60.0 /2.362

Dia. 5.0/0.197 Dia. 5.0/0.197

50.0 /1.968 (unit: mm/in.)

6−9
Installation FP0

6.5 Installation Using FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate

6.5 Installation Using FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate

Use M4 size pan−head screws for attachment of FP0 flat type mounting plate
(AFP0804) and install according to the dimensions shown below.
For a diagram showing detailed dimensions of the FP0 flat type mounting plate, see
*section 13.5.

FP0 flat type

mounting plate screws
Mounting panel
60.mm/2.362in.

Procedure:
1. Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of
the unit.
2. Install the FP0 unit on the FP0 flat type mounting
plate.
3. Align the expansion hooks with the plate and press
the hooks back down.

1
3
FP0 flat type mounting
plate

3
1

Notes

The FP0 flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) cannot be used for
an expansion unit.

next page

6 − 10
FP0 Installation

6.5 Installation Using FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate

An FP0 unit with an attached FP0 flat type mounting plate can
also be installed sideways on a DIN rail.

DIN rail

FP0 flat type mounting

2 plate

6 − 11
Installation FP0

6.5 Installation Using FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate

6 − 12
Chapter 7
Wiring

7.1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3

7.1.1 Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.2 Emergency Stop Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.3 Start Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 3
7.1.4 Momentary Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
7.1.5 Protecting Power Supply and Output
Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4

7.2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit . . . . . . . . 7 − 5

7.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 7

7.4 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 9

7.4.1 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 9
7.4.2 LED-Equipped Reed Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 10
7.4.3 Two-Wire Type Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 10
7.4.4 LED-Equipped Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 11

7.5 Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 12

7.5.1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads . . . . . 7 − 12
7.5.2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads . . 7 − 13

7.6 Wiring the Terminal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 14

7.7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 16

7.8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 18

7.8.1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 19

7.9 Wiring the RS232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 20

Wiring FP0

7−2
FP0 Wiring

7.1 Safety Instructions

7.1 Safety Instructions

In certain applications, malfunction may occur for the following reasons:
Power ON timing differences between the FP0 control unit and I/O or
motorized devices

An operation time lag when a momentary power drop occurs

Abnormality in the FP0 unit, power supply circuit, or other devices

In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate
safety circuits or other safety measures listed in the following:

7.1.1 Interlock Circuit

When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock

circuit that prevents clockwise and counter-clockwise signals from inputting into the
motor at the same time.

7.1.2 Emergency Stop Circuit

Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system

shutdown or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs.

7.1.3 Start Up Sequence

The FP0 should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized. To keep this
sequence, the following measures are recommended:
Set the mode switch from PROG. mode to RUN mode after power is
supplied to all of the outside devices

Program the FP0 so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the
outside devices are energized

Note
When stopping the operation of FP0 also, have the I/O devices
turned OFF after the FP0 has stopped operating.

next page

7−3
Wiring FP0

7.1 Safety Instructions

7.1.4 Momentary Power Failures

If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms, the FP0 continues to operate. If
the power is OFF for 5 ms or longer, operation changes depending on the combination
of units, the power supply voltage, and other factors. (In some cases, operation may
be the same as that for a power supply reset.)
If operation is to be continued following recovery from the momentary power failure, use
an automatic retaining sequence program that uses a hold type internal relay.

7.1.5 Protecting Power Supply and Output Sections

An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used. The power
supply for the control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an incorrect voltage
is directly applied, the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed. If using a power
supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective
element such as a fuse.
If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor
lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device, a protective element such
as a fuse should be attached externally.

7−4
FP0 Wiring

7.2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit

7.2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit

Use the power supply cable (AFP0581) that comes with the unit to connect the power
supply.

Power supply
FP0 control unit
connector
Power supply
cable
(AFP0581)
Green:
Function earth

Blue: 0 V
Brown:
24 V DC

Item Descriptions
Rated voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC

Notes

To minimize adverse effects from noise, twist the brown and

blue wires of the power supply cable.
To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the
power supply line, use an insulated power supply with an
internal protective circuit.
The regulator on the FP0 unit is a non-insulated type.
If using a power supply device without an internal protective
circuit, always make sure power is supplied to the unit
through a protective element such as a fuse.
next page

7−5
Wiring FP0

7.2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit

Isolate the wiring systems to the FP0, input/output devices,

and motor devices.

Circuit breaker

Motor
devices

Insulated
DC I/O
power devices
supply

Insulated
DC
power FP0
supply

The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to

the control unit is turned OFF before the input/output power
supplies.
If the input/output power supplies are turned OFF before the
power to the control unit, the FP0 control unit may detect a
drop in the input level, and malfunction.
Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion
unit from the same power supply, and turn the power ON and
OFF simultaneously for both.

7−6
FP0 Wiring

7.3 Grounding

7.3 Grounding

Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in

situations of excess noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
For grounding purposes, use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm2. The grounding
connection should have a resistance of less than 100 Ω.

Other Other
FP0 FP0
device device

CORRECT

Notes

The point of grounding should be as close to the FP0 control

unit as possible. The ground wire should be as short as
possible.
If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an
adverse effect. Always use an exclusive ground for each
device.
Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is
used, grounding may cause problems.
<Example>
Since the power supply line (24 VDC and GND terminal) of the
FP0 power supply connector is connected to the frame ground
(F.G.) through a varistor, if there is an irregular potential
between the power supply line (24 VDC and GND) and earth,
the varistor may be shorted.
Power supply connector
of FP0 control unit

24 V DC 

 Power supply lines
GND
Varistor Varistor (39 V DC)
F.G.

7−7
Wiring FP0

7.3 Grounding

When the plus side is grounded, do not ground the functional earth terminal.
Do not ground the FP0 functional earth terminal if the plus terminal of the power supply
is grounded.
Depending on the PC, some types have the SG terminal of the RS232C port connected
to the outside structure of the connector. Also, the outside structure of the FP0 tool port
is connected to the functional earth terminal. For this reason, connecting a PC will
connect the FP0 GND terminal to the functional earth terminal. In particular, because
a voltage of −24 V will be applied to the GND terminal when the plus terminal is
grounded, a potentially damaging short circuit will occur when, in this state, the GND
terminal and functional earth are connected.

Power

PC
Cable

Functional
earth
Outside Outside
structure structure

7−8
FP0 Wiring

7.4 Input Wiring

7.4 Input Wiring

Notes

Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the input wires while

taking into consideration the required current capacity.
Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are
separated, and so that the input wiring is separated from the
power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through
the same duct or wrap them up together.
Separate the input wires from the power and high voltage
wires by at least 100 mm/3.937 in.
In this section you find some examples for wiring sensors, an LED-equipped reed
switch, a two-wire type sensor and a LED-equipped limit switch.

7.4.1 Sensors

Relay output type NPN open collector output type

Input terminal Input terminal
Vcc
Sensor Output
FP0
COM FP0 Sensor
Relay 0V
COM
Internal Internal
circuit circuit
Power supply Power supply
for sensor for input Power supply for input

Universal output type Two-wire type (* next page)

Input terminal Input terminal
Vcc
Sensor Output Sensor
FP0
0V FP0
Internal COM COM
circuit Internal
circuit
Power supply for input Power supply for input

PNP open collector output type

Input terminal

Sensor
FP0
COM
Internal
circuit
Power supply for input

7−9
Wiring FP0

7.4 Input Wiring

7.4.2 LED-Equipped Reed Switch

When a LED is connected to an input contact such as LED-equipped reed switch, make
sure that the ON voltage applied to the FP0 input circuit is greater than 19.2 V DC.
In particular, take care when connecting a number of switches in series.

Input
terminal
LED-equipped 19.2 V DC
reed switch or more FP0

COM

24 V DC

7.4.3 Two-Wire Type Sensor

If the input of the FP0 does not turn OFF because of leakage current from the two-wire
type sensor, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below.
Input terminal

Two-wire Bleeder
type sensor resistor FP0
COM
Internal
circuit

I: Sensor’s leakage current (mA)

R: Bleeder resistor (kΩ)
The OFF voltage of the FP0 input is 2.4 V, therefore, select an R value so that the voltage
between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2.4 V.
(The impedance of the FP0 input terminal is 5.6 kΩ.)

The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R < or = 13.44

(kΩ)
5.6 × I − 2.4
The wattage W of the resistor is:
(Power supply voltage)2
W=
R
In the actual selection, use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W.

7 − 10
FP0 Wiring

7.4 Input Wiring

7.4.4 LED-Equipped Limit Switch

If the input of the FP0 does not turn OFF because of the leakage current from the
LED-equipped limit switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown
below.

Input
LED-equipped terminal
limit switch Bleeder
FP0
resistor
COM
Internal circuit

r: Internal resistor of limit switch (kΩ)

R: Bleeder resistor (kΩ)
The OFF voltage of the FP0 input is 2.4 V, therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V,
select R so that
24 - 2.4
the current will be greater than I =
r
13.44
The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R < or = (kΩ)
5.6 × I − 2.4
(Power supply voltage)2
The wattage W of the resistor is: W =
R
In the actual selection, use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W.

7 − 11
Wiring FP0

7.5 Output Wiring

7.5 Output Wiring

Notes

There is no fuse protection built into the output circuit.

Therefore, in order to protect against overheating of the output
circuitry caused by possible short circuits, install an external
fuse at each point. However, in cases such as short circuits,
the control unit itself may not be protected.
Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the output wires while
taking into consideration the required current capacity.
Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are
separated, and so that the output wiring is separated from the
power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through
the same duct or wrap them up together.
Separate the output wires from the power and high voltage
wires by at least 100 mm/3.937 in.
Protect the outputs as described below:

7.5.1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads

With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load.
When switching DC inductive loads with FP0 relay output type, be sure to connect a
diode across the ends of the load.
When using an AC inductive load

Surge absorber (*)

(*) Example of surge absorber:

Output [R: 50 Ω, C: 0.47 µF]

terminal
FP0

COM
AC inductive load

Varistor

Output
terminal
FP0
COM
AC inductive load

next page

7 − 12
FP0 Wiring

7.5 Output Wiring

When using a DC inductive load

Diode (*)

Output
terminal
FP0
COM
DC inductive load
(*) Diode:
Reverse voltage (VR): 3 times the load voltage
Average rectified forward current (I0): Load current or more

7.5.2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads

When connecting loads with large in-rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect a
protection circuit as shown below.

Resistor
Output Load
terminal
FP0
COM

Inductor
Output
Load
terminal
FP0

COM

7 − 13
Wiring FP0

7.6 Wiring the Terminal Type

7.6 Wiring the Terminal Type

A screw-down connection type terminal block socket for terminal of FP0 control unit and
analog I/O unit is used. The terminal block socket and suitable wires are given below.

Terminal block socket

Suitable wire

Terminal block socket

Item Description
Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co.
Model MC1,5/9-ST-3,5
Product number 1840434

Suitable wires (twisted wire)

Item Description
Control unit Size: AWG #24 to 16
Conductor cross-sectional area: 0.3 to 1.25 mm2
Analog
g I/O
/ unit Size: AWG #28 to 16
Conductor cross-sectional area: 0.08 to 1.25 mm2

Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve

If a pole terminal is being used, the following models are marketed by Phoenix Contact
Co.
Manufacturer Cross-sectional Size Product number
area (mm2)
Phoenix Contact Co. 0.25 AWG #24 AI 0,25−6YE
0.50 AWG #20 AI 0,5−6WH
0.75 AWG #18 AI 0,75−6GY
1.00 AWG #18 AI 1−6RD

Pressure welding tool for pole terminals

Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co.
Type CRIMPFOX UD6
Product number 12 04 43 6

When tightening the terminals of the terminal block socket, use a screwdriver (Phoenix
Contact Co., Product no. 1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 × 2.5. The tightening torque
should be 0.22 to 0.25 N⋅m (2.3 to 2.5 kgf⋅cm) or less.

7 − 14
FP0 Wiring

7.6 Wiring the Terminal Type

Procedure:
1. Remove a portion of the wire’s insulation.

7 mm/0.276 in. Suitable wire

2. Insert the wire into the terminal block socket until it

contacts the back of the block socket, and then
tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place.
Clockwise

Wire

Notes

When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch

the core wire.
Do not twist the wires to connect them.
Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may
break due to vibration.
After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire closes
upon counter-clockwise rotation, the connection is faulty.
Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then
re-connect the wire.
Clockwise Counter
clockwise
Wire

Wire
CORRECT INCORRECT

7 − 15
Wiring FP0

7.7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type

7.7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type

The housings and contacts listed below come supplied with the FP0. Use the wires
given below. Also, use the required special tool for connecting the wires.
Housing

Contact

Suitable wire

Supplied connector
Manufacturer Item Product number
Molex Japan
p Co.,, Ltd. Housing 51067-0900 (2 pieces)
Contact 50217-8100 (20 pieces)

Suitable wires (twisted wire)

− Size: AWG #24 to 18
− Conductor cross-sectional area: 0.2 to 0.75 mm2
− Insulation outside diameter: dia. 1.4 to dia. 3.0
Special crimping tool
− Manufacturer: Molex Japan Co., Ltd
− Product number: 57189-5000

Procedure:
1. Remove a portion of the wire’s insulation.
Wire

3 to 3.5 mm/0.118 to 0.138 in.

next page

7 − 16
FP0 Wiring

7.7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type

2. Place the contact in the crimping tool, place the wire

in the contact and lightly squeeze the tool.

Crimping tool

Wire

Contact
3. Insert the crimped wire into the housing until it
contacts the back side.
Housing

Note
When removing a wire, use a flat-head screwdriver, or other
similar tool, to pull up the hold-down pin of the housing and then
pull out the wire.

Screwdriver
Pull up

Hold-down pin

Pull out
Wire

7 − 17
Wiring FP0

7.8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type

7.8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type

The housings, semi-cover and pressure welders listed below come supplied with the
FP0. Use the wires given below. Also, use the required pressure connection tools for
connecting the wires.
Supplied connector
Unit Type/Order number C16/E16 C32/E32
C16/C32
/ Housing 10-pin type only 2 pieces 4 pieces
E /E
E16/E32 Semi-cover AXW61001 2 pieces 4 pieces
Welder (contact) AXW7221 5-pin × 4 5-pin × 8
Note) The AXW7221 is for the AWG#22 and #24. If the AWG#26 or #28 is used, please
purchase the AXW7231 (for the AWG#26 and #28) separately.
Suitable wires (twisted wire)
Size Conductor cross-sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current
AWG#22 0.3 mm2
dia 1.5
dia. 1 5 to dia.
dia 1.1
11 3A
AWG#24 0.2 mm2

Pressure connection tool

− Order number: AXY52000
Procedure:
The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire’s insulation, saving
labor.
1. Bend the welder (contact) back from the carrier, and
set it in the pressure connection tool.

2. Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it

stops, and lightly grip the tool.

next page

7 − 18
FP0 Wiring

7.8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type

3. After press-fitting the wire, insert it into the housing.

4. When all wires has been inserted, fit the semi-cover

into place.
semi-cover

Note
If using a MIL connector for flat cables, please specify the order
number AXM110915.

7.8.1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring

If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure-connected, the contact

puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact.

Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that

the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section.

7 − 19
Wiring FP0

7.9 Wiring the RS232C Port

7.9 Wiring the RS232C Port

When using the RS232C port, use the screw-down connection type terminal and the
wire according to the following procedures.

FP0 Control unit with RS232C port

(FP0 C10CRM/C10CRS/C14CRM/C14CRS/C16CT/C16CP/C32CT/C32CP)

Item Specification
Baud rate 300/600/1200/2400/4800/
9600/19200 bps
Transmission 3m/9.84 ft.
distance
Terminal blockMade by Phoenix Contact
Co. (3-pin)
Product number: MKDS
1/3-3.5
RS232C port Communication half-duplex
terminal layout method

Settings when shipped from the factory

These are changed using system registers
412 to 414. The settings in effect when the
unit is shipped from the factory are noted
SG: Signal Ground below.
RD: Receive Data
412 RS232C port is not used.
SD: Send Data
413 Character bit: 8 bits
Parity check: odd
Stop bit: 1 bit
Header: without STX code
Terminator: CR
414 Baud rate: 9600 bps

Suitable wires (twisted wire)

− Size: AWG #28 to 16
− Conductor cross-sectional area: 0.08 to 1.25 mm2
Use a shielded wire of the above wiring. We recommend grounding the shield section.
Also, if using a pole terminal, see * section 7.6.

7 − 20
FP0 Wiring

7.9 Wiring the RS232C Port

When tightening the RS232C port, use a screwdriver (Phoenix Contact Co., Product no.
1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 × 2.5. The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25
N⋅m (2.3 to 2.5 kgf⋅cm) or less.
Procedure:
1. Remove a portion of the wire’s insulation.

Suitable wire
7 mm/0.276 in.

2. Insert wire into the RS232C port until it contacts the

back of the RS232C port.

RS232C port

Suitable wire

3. Tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place.

Clockwise

7 − 21
Wiring FP0

7.9 Wiring the RS232C Port

Notes

When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch

the core wire.
Do not twist the wires to connect them.
Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may
break due to vibration.
After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
In the RS232C port terminal construction, if the wire closes
upon counter-clockwise rotation, the connection is faulty.
Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then
re-connect the wire.

Clockwise Counter
clockwise
Wire

Wire
CORRECT INCORRECT

7 − 22
Chapter 8
Precautions During Programming

8.1 Use of Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3

8.1.1 Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 3
8.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP,
SET, or RST Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 4

8.2 Handling BCD Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 5

8.2.1 BCD Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 5
8.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 5

8.3 Handling Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7

8.3.1 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7
8.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified
with Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 7
8.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register . . . . . . . 8 − 8

8.4 Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 10

8.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 10
8.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation
Error Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 10
8.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 11
8.4.4 Points to Check in Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 12

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method . . . . 8 − 13

8.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 13
8.5.2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start
Time 8 − 14

next page
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control

Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 16

8.6 Precautions for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 18

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 19

8.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN . . . . . . . . 8 − 19
8.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not
Possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 20
8.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite
During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 21
8.7.4 Changing Modes in FP Programmer II . . . . 8 − 22

8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter

During RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 23
8.8.1 Method of Rewriting Constant
in FP Programmer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 23
8.8.2 Method of Rewriting a Value
in the Set Value Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 24

8.9 Processing During Forced Input and Output . . . . . . 8 − 27

8.10 Setting the Clock/Calendar Timer

(T32CT type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 − 28

8−2
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.1 Use of Duplicated Output

8.1 Use of Duplicated Output

8.1.1 Duplicated Output

Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a program.

If the same output is specified for the “OT” and “KP” instructions, it is considered to be
duplicated output.
Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions, such as the SET or RST
instruction, or high−level instruction for data transfer, it is not regarded as duplicated
output.
If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, under normal
conditions, it will be flagged as an error, the ERROR/ALARM LED will light and the
self-diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on.

How to Check for Duplicated Use

You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool, by the
following method:
Using FP Programmer II:
Operate the TOTAL CHECK function.
Key operation:
(−) READ
9 ENT
OP

If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message (DUP USE) and the address will
be displayed.
Using FPWIN GR software:
Execute the “Debug” on “Totally Check Program.”
If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message (DUPLICATED OUTPUT
ERROR) and the address will be displayed. If you execute “SEARCH AN ERROR,” the
error message will be displayed, and the first address number will be displayed.

Enabling Duplicated Output

If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program, duplicated
output can be enabled.
In this case, change the setting of system register 20 to ”enable” (when using FP
Programmer II, set K1).
When this is done, an error will not occur when the program is executed.

8−3
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.1 Use of Duplicated Output

8.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET, or RST Instruction

Condition of Internal and Output Relays During Operation

When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such
as transfer instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are
rewritten at each step during operation.

Example: Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to
X2 are all on).
X0 R0
S

R0
This section of the program is
processed as if R0 were on.

X1 R0
R

This section of the program is

processed as if R0 were off.

X2 R0

This section of the program is

processed as if R0 were on.

The output is determined by the final operation results

If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST, or data
transfer instructions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the results
of the operation at the greatest program address.

Example: Output to the same output relay Y0 with OT, SET and RST
instructions.
X0 Y0
Y0: on
X1 Y0
S Y0: on

X2 Y0
R Y0: off

When X0 to X2 are all on, Y0 is output as off at I/O update.

If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update
instruction “F143 (IORF)”.

8−4
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.2 Handling BCD Data

8.2 Handling BCD Data

8.2.1 BCD Data

BCD is an acronym for binary−coded decimal, and means that each digit of a decimal
number is expressed as a binary number.

Example:
Expressing a decimal number in BCD:

Decimal number
Each digit is converted
to a binary number.

BCD 0110 0100 0101

(Binary−coded
decimal)

8.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC

When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7−segment
display (with a decoder), the data must be in BCD form. In this case, use a data
conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below.
BCD arithmetic instructions “F40 (B+) to F58 (DB−1)” also exist which allow direct
operation on BCD data, however, it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation
instructions “F20 (+) to F38(D−1)” as operation in the PLC takes place in binary.

Input From a Digital Switch

Use the BCD−to−BIN conversion instruction “F81 (BIN)”.
Digital 1 9 9 2 1 9 9 2
switch
Data inputted into 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
the PLC (BCD data)

PLC BCD (Conversion

↓ using
BIN F81 (BIN) Data which can be 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
instruction) processed in the PLC
(BIN data) Converted to 1992 in decimal data.

8−5
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.2 Handling BCD Data

Output to a 7−segment Display (with Decoder)

Use the BIN−to−BCD conversion instruction “F80 (BCD)”.

BIN (Conversion Data processed in 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

PLC PLC (BIN data)
↓ using
BCD F80 (BCD)
instruction)
Data outputted from 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
PLC (BCD data)
7-segment 1 9 9 2
display

8−6
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.3 Handling Index Registers

8.3 Handling Index Registers

8.3.1 Index Registers

Like other registers, index registers have two points, IX and IY, for reading and writing
16-bit data.
Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number. (This is also called
index modification.)

Example:
Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number
specified by the contents of an index register.
R0
F0 MV, DT100, IXDT0

Base memory area.

In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the
contents of IX with DT0 acting as a base. For example, when IX contains K10 the
destination will be DT10, and when IX is K20, the destination will be DT20.
In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single
instruction, and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts
of data.

8.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers

Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data
registers DT.
IXWX0, IXWY1, IXWR0, IXSV0, IXEV2, IXDT100
Constants can also be modified.
IXK10, IXH1001
An index register cannot modify another index register.
IXIX, IXIY
When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32-bit data, specify
with IX. In this case, IX and IY are handled together as 32-bit data.
Higher 16-bit area Lower 16-bit area

Contents of IY Contents of IX

8−7
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.3 Handling Index Registers

8.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register

Repeatedly Reading in External Data

Example:
Writing the contents of word external input relay WX3 to a
sequence of data registers beginning from DT0.
R0
F0 MV, K0, IX 1

R1
DF F0 MV, WX3, IXDT0 2

F35 +1, IX 3

1 When R0 turns on, K0 is written to index register IX.

2 When the R1 turns on, the contents of WX3 is transferred to
the data register specified by IXDT0.
3 Add 1 to IX.
In this case, the contents of IX will change successively,
and the destination data register will be as follows.

Input times Contents of Destination

of R1 IX data register
1st 0 DT0
2nd 1 DT1
3rd 2 DT2
: : :

Inputting and Outputting Data Based on a Number Specified by an Input

Example 1: Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch

PLC

Timer 2 0 7 9 4 Timer set value

setting (timer time setting)
number
WX1 WX0
Digital
switches

8−8
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.3 Handling Index Registers

R0
DF F81 BIN, WX1, IX 1

F81 BIN, WX0, IXSV0 2

1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and

set it in index register IX.
2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and
stored in the timer set value area SV specified by contents
of IX.

Example 2: External output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified

by a digital switch
WY0

7-segmenet
Timer elapsed
indicator
value display

PLC

Timer
number 1 Digital
setting switches
WX1
R1
DF F81 BIN, WX1, IX 1

F80 BCD, IXEV0, WY0 2

1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary, and

set it in index register IX.
2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by
IX to BCD, and output it to word external output relay WY0.

8−9
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.4 Operation Errors

8.4 Operation Errors

8.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors

An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high-level

instruction is executed.
When an operation error occurs, the ERROR/ALARM LED on the FP0 control unit will
blink and the operation error flags (R9007 and R9008) will turn on.
The operation error code “E45” is set at special data register DT9000.
The error address is stored in special data registers DT9017 and DT9018.
Types of Operation Error
Address error
The memory address (number) specified by index modification is outside the area which
can be used
BCD data error
Operation is attempted on non−BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is
executed, or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible
conversion range.
Parameter error
In an instruction requiring the specification of control data, the specified data is outside
the possible range.
Over area error
The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range.

8.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs

Normally, the operation stops when an operation error occurs.

However, when you set system register 26 to “continuation” (KI), the FP0 control unit
operates even if an operation error occurs.

8 − 10
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.4 Operation Errors

8.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors

Procedure:
1. Check the location of the error.
Check the address where the error occurred, which is stored in DT9017 and DT9018,
and make sure the high−level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate.
2. Clear the error.
Use a programming tool to clear the error. (If the mode selector is set to RUN, RUN will
resume as soon as the error is cleared.)
In FP Programmer II, press the following keys.
(−) SHIFT (DELT)
ACLR 1 1 2 ENT
OP SC INST

An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode, however, the
contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared.
An error can also be cleared by executing a F148 (self-diagnostic error set) instruction.

8 − 11
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.4 Operation Errors

8.4.4 Points to Check in Program

Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register.

Example: When a data register is modified using an index register

R0
F0 MV, DT0, IXDT0

In this case, index register (IX) modifies the address of data

register DT0. If data in IX is larger than the last address of the
data register, an operation error will occur. If the PLC you are
using is of the FP0 16-point type, the last address of the data
register is DT1659. If the data in IX exceeds the range of K0 to
K255, an operation error will occur. The same is true when the
contents of IX are negative.
Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD ↔ BIN data conversion?

Example: When BCD−to−BIN conversion is attempted

R0
F81 BIN, DT0, DT100

In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of

the digits A through F such as 12A4, conversion will be
impossible and an operation error will result.

Example: When BIN−to−BCD conversion is attempted

R0
F80 BCD, DT1, DT101

In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value

greater than K9999, an operation error will occur.
Check if the divisor of a division instruction is K0.

Example:
R0
F32 %, DT0, DT100, DT200

In this case, if the content of DT100 is K0, an operation error

will occur.

8 − 12
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

8.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method

Instructions Using the Leading Edge Detection Operation

DF (leading edge differential) instructions
Count input for CT instructions
Count input for F118 (UDC) instructions
Shift input for SR instructions
Shift input for F119 (LRSR) instructions
NSTP instructions

Leading Edge Detection Method

An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where
its trigger (execution condition) is detected switching from off to on.

Standard operation Leading edge differential operation

on on
Trigger off Trigger off

on on
Operation of off Operation of off

instruction instruction
Executed only one time
Executed every scan
The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are
compared, and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the
current condition is on. In any other case, the instruction is not executed.

8 − 13
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

Precautions When Using an Instruction Which Performs Leading Edge

Detection
When RUN begins, for example when the system is powered on, the off → on change
of the execution condition (trigger) is not detected. The instruction is not executed.
Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on section 8.5.2.
When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions below which change
the order of execution of instructions, the operation of the instruction may change
depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.
Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions,
such as:
MC and MCE instructions
JP and LBL instructions
LOOP and LBL instructions
CNDE instruction
Step ladder instructions
Subroutine instructions

8.5.2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time

Operation of first scan after RUN begins

The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been
switched to the RUN mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if
the trigger (execution condition) is already on.
RUN
(Power on)

Trigger

Operation

Not executed Executed

If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior
to switching to RUN mode, use R9014 (initial pulse off relay) in your program on the
following page. (R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and
turns on at the second scan.)

8 − 14
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

Example 1: DF (leading edge differential) instruction

X0 Y0
DF

Add R9014

X0 R9014 Y0
DF

RUN
(Power on)

X0

Y0

Even if X0 was initially on, the input condition (X0) for the DF
instruction is off−to−on at the second scan, therefore derivative output
is obtained.

Example 2: CT (counter) instruction

X0
CT 100

X1

Add R9014

X0 R9014
CT 100

X1

RUN
(Power on)

X0

CT100
counting
operation Even if X0 was initially on, the input condition (X0) for the counter
is off−to−on at the second scan, therefore the count is
incremented.

8 − 15
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

8.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction

Instructions which leading edge detection compare the condition of the previous
execution and the condition of the current execution, and execute the instruction only
if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on. In any other case, the
instruction is not executed.
When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes
the order of instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the
instruction may change as follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this
point.

Example 1:
Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions
X0
MC 0
X1 Y0
DF

MCE 0

Time chart 1

X0

X1

Y0

Previous
execution of DF The input condition (X1) for the DF instruction has
instruction not changed since the time of the previous
execution, thus derivative output is not obtained.

Time chart 2

X0

X1

Y0

Previous
execution of DF The input condition (X1) for the DF instruction has
instruction changed from off to on since the time of the previous
execution, thus derivative output is obtained.

8 − 16
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

Example 2:
Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions
R0
JP 1
X0
CT 100

X1

LBL 1

Time chart 1

R0

X0

Counting
operation

Final timing at
which the The count is not incremented, because the final
previous JP timing at which the previous JP instruction was not
instruction was executed has not been changed, and the execution
not executed condition X0 for the counter input has not changed.

Time chart 2

R0

X0

Counting
operation

Final timing at
which the The count is incremented, because the count input
previous JP changed from off to on after the final timing at which
instruction the previous JP instruction was not executed.
was not
executed

8 − 17
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.6 Precautions for Programming

8.6 Precautions for Programming

Programs which do not execute correctly
Do not write the following programs as they will not execute correctly.
Program example 1:
Program in which the example 1 is rewritten
ANS
X0 X1 Y0 X0 X1 Y0
DF DF

X2 X0 X2

Program example 2:
Program in which the example 2 is rewritten
ANS
X0 X1 TMX5, K30 Y0 X0 X1 TMX 5, K 30 Y0

X2 X0 X2

Program example 3:
Program in which the example 3 is rewritten
PSHS
X0 X1 Y0 X0 X1 Y0

X2 Y1 X0 X2 Y1
DF DF

X3 X0 X3
RDS

POPS

When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a

differential instruction (DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS)
instruction, read stack (RDS) instruction, or pop stack (POPS) instruction.

8 − 18
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

8.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN

How Operation of Rewrite During RUN

The FP0 allows program rewriting even in RUN mode. When a rewrite is attempted
during RUN, the tool service time is temporarily extended, program rewriting is
performed, and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode. For this
reason, the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several msec to
several hundreds of msec.

Operation During Rewrite

External output (Y) is held.
External output (X) is ignored.
The timer (T) stops the clock.
Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions (DF), counter instructions
(CT), and left/right shift registers [F119 (LRSR)] are ignored.
Interrupt functions are stopped.
Internal clock relays (special internal relays) are also stopped.
Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite.

Set Values for Timer/Counter Instructions

All set values specified with decimal constants (K) in timer and counter instructions are
preset in the corresponding set value areas (SV). Values in the elapsed value area (EV)
do not change.

Operation of Rewrite During RUN Completed Flag

The rewrite during RUN completed flag (R9034) is a special internal relay that goes on
for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode. It can be
used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program. (Supported in
CPU Ver. 2.0 and subsequent versions)

8 − 19
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

8.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible

When the timeout error message is indicated:

Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in
PLC has been already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.

1. When ladder symbol mode

As a ladder editing is left, set it to the offline edit mode. Complete the program
conversion in the tool software, and then change to the online edit mode to check.
2. When boolean mode
A ladder editing is cleared.
Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again. After the
operation, change to the online edit mode to check.
When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series
programmable display.
Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN.
(The default setting is 5 seconds.)
Select “Transfer” from “File” in the
menu bar. The “transfer data” screen
will open. Select “Condition” to open
“Communication Setting” screen.
Change the value for “Timeout”.Click
“OK” button to complete the change of
setting.

8 − 20
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

Instructions which do not allow rewriting during RUN

Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
Control instructions (ED/LBL)
(LBL instructions allow insertion and writing, but not deletion and clearing.)
Instructions which do not allow rewriting to subprograms
The following instructions do not allow rewriting during subroutines or interrupt
programs.
Jump/label instructions (JP/LBL)
Loop/label instructions (LOOP/LBL)
Master control relay/master control relay end instructions (MC/MCE)
Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
When a syntax error has occurred.
During forced input/output operation

Interrupt Restrictions
When using interrupt, high-speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do
not perform a rewrite during RUN.
If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the following problems may occur. Exercise caution.
Interrupt programs will be disabled. Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once
again.

Example: Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)

R9013
ICTL, S1, S2
R9034

The high-speed counter will continue to count.

At 2.5 kHz or higher during one−phase, one channel counting or 1.25 Hz or higher
during one−phase, two channel counting, miscounts may occur.
Target value match on/off instructions (F166/F167) will continue.
Coincidence programs will be disabled.
Pulse output and PWM output will be stopped. The F168 instruction (positioning control)
will continue to operate.
However, when the maximum output frequency is higher than 2.5 kHz during
one−phase, one channel counting or 1.25 Hz during one−phase, two channel counting,
the output pulse number may differ from the set number.

8 − 21
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

8.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN

Item FPWIN GR FPWIN GR FP Programmer II

Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Rewrite procedure Maximum of 128 steps. Rewriting performed by step.
Changes are performed by Caution is required as rewriting takes place simulta-
block. neously with the change.
When PG conversion is ex- In the case of FP Programmer II, the mode must be
ecuted online, the program changed. (See section 8.7.4.)
will be rewritten.

Block a Block b

Operation of OT/KP If an instruction written in If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block

each block a is deleted in block b, b, the condition before the rewrite will be held.
instruction the condition before the re- Y contact relays which are on will be held in the on
write will be held. status. To turn them off in the RUN mode, use
forced output.
TM/CT If an instruction written in If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block
block a is deleted in block b, b, the condition before the rewrite will be held.
the condition before the re- Set values specified by K constants in TM/CT in-
write will be held. structions are preset in all of the corresponding SV’s
Set values specified by K in the program. (Elapsed values EV do not change.)
constants in TM/CT instruc- In the case of FP Programmer II, set values can be
tions are preset in all of the rewritten during operation without affecting the timer.
corresponding SV’s in the For detailed information section 8.8
program. (Elapsed values
EV do not change.)
High-level If an instruction written in If deleted, the output memory area will be held.
instructions block a is deleted in block b,
the condition before the re-
write will be held.
MC/MCE When writing MC/MCE in- Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is
structions, be sure to write not possible. Write or delete the instruction in
the instructions as a pair. FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode.
CALL/SUB/ A subroutine is a program Write in the order: RET, SUB, CALL
RET appearing between SUBn Delete in the order: CALL, SUB, RET
and RET instructions. Be
sure to write it to an address
which follows the ED in-
struction.
INT/IRET An interrupt program is a Write in the order: IRET, INT
program appearing between Delete in the order:INT, IRET
INTn and IRET instructions.
Be sure to write it to an ad-
dress which follows the ED
instruction.

next page

8 − 22
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

Item FPWIN GR FPWIN GR FP Programmer II

Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Operation of SSTP/STPE A distance with the same Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not
each instruc- number cannot be defined possible for a program with no step ladder area.
tion twice. Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in
An SSTP instruction cannot FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode.
be written in a subprogram. In the case of an SSTP instruction only, writing and
deletion of a single instruction is possible for a pro-
gram with a step ladder area.
JP/LOOP/LBL Be sure to write the instruc- Write in the order: JP-LBL or LOOP-LBL.
tion for setting the loop Delete in the order: LBL-JP or LBL-LOOP.
number before LBL-LOOP
instructions.

8.7.4 Changing Modes in FP Programmer II

Changing program modes

FP Programmer II is normally in PROG−EDIT mode which does not allow unintentional
rewriting of programs. To perform a rewrite during RUN, the mode must be changed to
RUN−EDIT mode.
Change the mode as shown below. After the rewrite, change back to PROG−EDIT
mode to prevent accidental rewriting.
Procedure for changing to RUN−EDIT mode
(−)
ACLR 1 4 ENT 1 WRT
OP

Procedure for changing to PROG−EDIT mode

(−)
ACLR 1 4 ENT 0 WRT
OP

8 − 23
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

8.8.1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer II

Timer set value This method rewrites the

value in the program.
X0 TMX 5,K 30

T5 Y0

Rewrite Method Using FP Programmer II

Example of changing the set value of timer 5 from K30 to K50
Procedure:
1. Read the address containing the timer instruction.
SHIFT TM ST SRC READ READ
5
SC T-SV X-WX

2. Clear the constant (K30).

(HELP)
CLR

3. Enter the new constant (K50).

(BIN)
5 0 WRT
K/H

Operation and Cautions After the Change

After the change, the timer or counter in operation will continue to run. Operation based
on the changed set value will be started the next time the execution condition changes
from off to on.
When this method is used, the program itself will change. Thus, when the mode is
changed and then set back to RUN or when the power is turned on, the changed set
value will be preset.

8 − 24
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

8.8.2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area

Transfers to SV area when mode

changes to RUN mode.
Timer set value
SV5
X0 TMX5, K 30
30

T5 Y0
This method rewrites the value
in the set value area. The
program itself is not rewritten.

Changing values in the set value area SV

Values in the set value area SV can be changed with the following procedures.
− Method using the programming tool software (FPWIN GR)
− Method using the FP Programmer II
− Method using the program (high-level instruction)
Operation and cautions after the change
After the change, the timer or counter in operation will continue to run. Operation based
on the changed set value will be started the next time the execution condition changes
from off to on.
With these methods, the value in the set value area SV will change, however, the
program itself will not change. Therefore, when the mode is changed and then set back
to RUN or when the power is turned on, operation will take place as follows:
When a set value in the program is specified by a constant K
The constant K is preset in the set value area SV. After the change, it will no longer be
effective.
When a set value in the program is specified by a set value area number
In the case of a non−hold type timer or counter, 0 is preset in the set value area SV. In the
case of a hold type timer or counter, the value changed by the method on the following
page is preset in the set value area SV.

8 − 25
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

Method 1: Method using the programming tool software

Procedure:
Select “Monitoring Registers” from the Online menu.

Explanation of each column

(1) Displays the line number.

(2) Displays the device code and device number.

(3) Displays the monitored data.

During online monitoring, you can make changes to the data by either pressing [Enter]
in this column or by double clicking.

(4) Displays the base (decimal, hexadecimal, binary or ASCII) and the number of words.

(5) Displays the I/O comment for each register.

You can input I/O comments for each register by either pressing [Enter] in this column or
by double clicking.

Click in each column and change the settings.

For details, please refer to the FPWIN GR help menu.

The “FPWIN GR” tool software has a similar menu.

For information on operating the menus, please check the Help menu.

8 − 26
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.8 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

Method 2: Method using the FP Programmer II

Use the word data monitor function to read the set value area SV of the timer or counter
to be changed, and rewrite the value.
Example of changing the value of SV0 from K30 to K50.
Procedure:
1. Execute word data monitor (OP8).
(−)
8 ENT
OP

2. Read SV0.
TM READ
0
T-SV

3. Clear SV0.
(HELP)
CLR

4. Write the new changing value.

(BIN)
5 0 WRT
K/H

Method 3: Method using the program (high-level instruction)

To change a set value of timer/counter based on an input condition, use a high-level
instruction as shown below to rewrite the value in the set value area SV of the desired
timer or counter.

Example: Changing the set value to K20 when input R0 turns on

R0
F0 MV, K20, SV3

R1 TMX 3, K50
When R0 turns on, the timer set value
changes from 5 seconds to 2 seconds.
T3 Y0

8 − 27
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.9 Processing During Forced Input and Output

8.9 Processing During Forced Input and Output

Processing when forced input/output is initiated during RUN

Forced reset / reset processing

Input/output update

Forced set / reset processing

Operation

Forced set / reset processing

Peripheral service

Processing of external input (X)

Regardless of the state of the input from the input device, forced on/off operation will
take precedence at a contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the input
LED will not blink, however, the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten.
Contacts not specified will read in the on/off state according to the condition of the input
from the input device.
Processing of external output (Y)
Regardless of the result of operation, forced on/off will take precedence at a contact
specified for forced input/output. At this time, the area of output Y in the operation
memory will be forcedly rewritten. External output will take place according to the
input/output update timing in the above diagram.
The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.
Timer (T) and Counter (C)
Regardless of the timer/counter input condition, forced on/off operation will take
precedence at a contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the contact of the
timer (T) or counter (C) in the operation memory will be rewritten. Timing and counting
will not take place during control.
The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.

8 − 28
FP0 Precautions During Programming

8.10 Setting the Clock/Calendar Timer (T32CT type only)

8.10 Setting the Clock/Calendar Timer (T32CT type only)

Ckock/Calendar timer setting area
The write area and read area for clock/calendar timer is allocated to special data
registers DT90053 to DT90057.
Special data register Upper byte Lower byte Read Write
number
DT90053 Hour data Minute data
H00 to H59 Available Not Available
H00 to H23
DT90054 Minute data Second data
Available Available
H00 to H59 H00 to H59
DT90055 Day data Hour data
Available Available
H01 to H31 H00 to H23
DT90056 Year data Month data
H00 to H99 Available Available
H01 to H12
DT90057 −−− Day of week data
Available Available
H00 to H06

Clock/Calendar timer setting

There are three ways to set the clock/calendar timer, as follows.

− When using the Windows version of FPWIN

1. While online, open the setting menu by selecting [Tool] and then [Set PLC Date and
Time].
2. Enter the “Date” and “Time” and press [OK].

− When using DOS version software

1. While online, select [Monitor] and then [Data monitor].
2. Select [Save data] (f6) and then save data registers DT90054 to DT90057.
3. Select [Write ON] (f4) and [Data write] (f7) in that order and then write a value.

8 − 29
Precautions During Programming FP0

8.10 Setting the Clock/Calendar Timer (T32CT type only)

− Setting and changing using a program

1. Transfer the value to be written into special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 that
are allocated in clock/calendar timer setting area.
2. Write H8000 to DT90058.

Note: Execute the transfer using ”P” type (derivative execution) instruction or transfer in
the order of H8000 to H0000.

Example: With X0 on, adjust to the 5th day, 12:00:00.

X0
DF F0 MV, H 0, DT9054 Set 0 minutes and 0 seconds

F0 MV, H 512, DT9055 Set 5th day, 12 o’clock

F0 MV, H8000, DT9058 Adjust time

Caution regarding backup of clock/calendar timer data

− Clock/Calendar timer values are backed up in the secondary battery.
− Do not use until the secondary battery has been sufficiently charged.
− When first used no value has been determined; therefore, please write values using a
programming tool or similar.

8 − 30
Chapter 9
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/
PWM Output

9.1 Outline of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 3

9.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built−in High−speed
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 3
9.1.2 Performance of Built−in High−speed
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 4

9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 5

9.2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 5
9.2.2 Functions and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 7

9.3 High−speed Counter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 9

9.3.1 Outline of High−speed Counter Function . . . . 9 − 9
9.3.2 Types of Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 9
9.3.3 I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 11
9.3.4 Instructions Used with High−speed Counter
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 12
9.3.5 Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 14

9.4 Pulse Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 18

9.4.1 Outline of Pulse Output Function . . . . . . . . 9 − 18
9.4.2 Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 19
9.4.3 I/O Allocation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 20
9.4.4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 22
9.4.5 Sample Program for Positioning Control . . 9 − 25

next page
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.5 PWM Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 33

9.5.1 Outline of PWM Output Function . . . . . . . . . 9 − 33
9.5.2 Instruction Used with PWM Output
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 33

9−2
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.1 Outline of Functions

9.1 Outline of Functions

9.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built−in High−speed Counter

Functions that use the built−in high−speed counter

There are three functions available when using the high−speed counter built into the
FP0.
High−speed counter function
The high−speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or
encoders. When the count reaches the target value, this function turns on/off the
desired output.

Roller Cutter

Lead wire, tape

Motor Inverter
START
Encoder STOP signal
Cutter blade
control signal
Encoder output is FP0
input to the high−
speed counter

Pulse output function

Combined with a commercially available motor driver, the pulse output function enables
positioning control. With the appropriate instruction, you can perform trapezoidal
control, home return, and JOG operation.

Stepping motor,
Servo motor
FP0 Pulse output
Y0 Motor
CW/CCW output driver
Y2
1

Pulse output
Y1 Motor
CW/CCW output driver
Y3
2
Stepping motor,
Servo motor

9−3
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.1 Outline of Functions

PWM output function

By using the appropriate instruction, the PWM output function enables a pulse output
of the desired duty ratio.
When you increase the pulse width...

heating
increases.
When you decrease it...

heating
decreases.

9.1.2 Performance of Built−in High−speed Counter

Channel number
There are four channels for the built−in high−speed counter.
The channel number allocated for the high−speed counter will change depending on
the function being used.

Counting range
K−8388608 to K8388607
(HFF8000 to H7FFFFF)
(Coded 24−bit binary)

9−4
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items

9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items

9.2.1 Specifications

Table of high−speed counter function specifications

Input/output contact number Built−in Memory area used Performance specifica- Related
being used high− tions instruc-
speed tions
On/off Count Input counter Control Elapsed Target Minimum Maximum
output mode contact channel flag value value input counting speed
number no. area area pulse
(value in width Using Using
paren− only 1 mul-
thesis is chan- tiple
reset nel chan-
input) nels

Spec- Incre- X0 CH0 R903A DT9044, DT9046, 50 µs Max. Total of F0 (MV),

ify the mental (X2) DT9045/ DT9047/ 10 kHz 4 CH F1 (DMV),
input, DT90044, DT90046, with F166
de- Decre- DT90045 DT90047 max. (HC1S),
sired mental 10 kHz F167
output input X1 CH1 R903B DT9048, DT9050, Max. (HC1R)
from (X2) DT9049/ DT9051/ 10 kHz
Y0 to DT90048, DT90050,
Y7 DT90049 DT90051
X3 CH2 R903C DT9104, DT9106, 100 µs Max.
(X5) DT9105/ DT9107/ 5 kHz
DT90104, DT90106,
DT90105 DT90107
X4 CH3 R903D DT9108, DT9110, Max.
(X5) DT9109/ DT9111/ 5 kHz
DT90108, DT90110,
DT90109 DT90111
Spec- 2−phas X0 CH0 R903A DT9044, DT9046, 250 µs Max. Total of
ify the e input, X1 DT9045/ DT9047/ 2 kHz 2 CH
Incre- (X2) DT90044, DT90046, with
de- mental/ DT90045 DT90047 max.
sired decre- 2 kHz
output mental
from input, X3 CH2 R903C DT9104, DT9106, 500 µs Max.
Y0 to Direc- X4 DT9105/ DT9107/ 1 kHz
Y7 tional (X5) DT90104, DT90106,
distinc- DT90105 DT90107
tion

Note
Reset input X2 can be set to either CH0 or CH1. Reset input X5
can be set to either CH2 or CH3.

9−5
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items

Table of pulse output function specifications

Input/output contact number being used Built−in Memory area used Performance Related
high−
high specifications instruc-
instruc
Pulse Direc- Home Near speed Con- Elapsed Target for maximum tions
output tional out- input home counter trol value value output fre-
put input channel flag area area quency
no.
Y0 Y2 X0 DT9052/ CH0 R903A DT9044, DT9046, Max. F0 (MV),
DT90052 DT9045/ DT9047/ 10 kHz for F1 (DMV),
<bit2> DT90044, DT90046, 1−point output F168
DT90045 DT90047 Max. (SPD1),
5 kHz for F169 (PLS)
Y1 Y3 X1 DT9052/ CH1 R903B DT9048, DT9050, 2−point output
DT90052 DT9049/ DT9051/
<bit6> DT90048, DT90050,
DT90049 DT90051

Note
The maximum 1−point output for instruction F168 (SPD1) is 9.5
kHz.

Table of PWM output specifications

Output number being used Built−in Memory area used Performance Related
high speed
high−speed specifications instructions
counter Control flag for output
channel no. frequency
Y0 CH0 R903A Frequency: F170 (PWM)
0.15 Hz to 38 Hz
((CPU ver. 2.0 or
later: 100 to 1 kHz)
Y1 CH1 R903B
Duty:
0.1 % to 99.9 %

9−6
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items

9.2.2 Functions and Restrictions

Channel
The same channel cannot be used by more than one function.
Example of prohibited application:
You cannot share CH0 with the high−speed counter and pulse output functions.

I/O number (input/output contact point)

The number allocated to each function cannot be used for normal input or outputs.
Example of prohibited application
When using CH0 for 2−phase inputting with the high−speed counter function, you
cannot allot X0 and X1 to normal inputs.
When using Y0 for the pulse output function, you cannot allot origin input X0 to a normal
input.
When using Y0 for the pulse output (with directional output operating) function, you
cannot allot Y2 (directional output) to a normal input or output.
When using the high−speed counter with a mode that does not use the reset input, you
can allot the inputs listed in parenthesis in the specifications table to a normal input.
Example of allowable application
When using the high−speed counter with no reset input and 2−phase input, you can
allot X2 to a normal input.

Restrictions on the execution of related instructions (F166 to F170)

When any of the instructions related to the high−speed counter (F166 to F170) are
executed, the control flag (special internal relay: R903A to R903D) corresponding to the
used channel turns on.
When the flag for a channel turns on, another instruction cannot be executed using that
same channel.
Example of prohibited application
While executing F166 (target value match on instruction) and flag R903A is in the on
state, F167 (target value match off instruction) cannot be executed with CH0.

9−7
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.2 Specifications and Restricted Items

Restrictions for maximum counting speed/pulse output frequency

The counting speed when using the high−speed counter function will differ depending
on the counting mode as shown in the table.

Example 1:
While in the incremental input mode and using the two
channels CH0 and CH1, if CH0 is being used at 8 kHz, then
CH1 can be used up to 2 kHz.

Example 2:
While in the 2−phase input mode and using the two channels
CH0 and CH2, if CH0 is being used at 1 kHz, then CH2 can be
used up to 1 kHz.

The maximum output frequency when using the pulse output function will differ
depending on the output contact number as shown in the table.

Example 1:
When using either only Y0 or only Y1, the maximum output
frequency is 10 kHz.

Example 2:
When using the two contacts Y0 and Y1, the maximum output
frequency is 5 kHz.

When using the high−speed counter function and pulse output function, specifications
will differ depending on the conditions of use.

Example:
When using one pulse output contact with a maximum output
frequency of 5 kHz, the maximum counting speed of the
high−speed counter being used simultaneously is 5 kHz with
the incremental mode and 1 kHz with the 2−phase mode.

9−8
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

9.3.1 Outline of High−speed Counter Function

High−speed counter function

The high−speed counter function counts the input signals, and when the count reaches
the target value, turns on and off the desired output.
The high−speed counter function is able to count high−speed pulses of frequencies up
to 10 kHz.
To turn on an output when the target value is matched, use the target value match on
instruction (F166). To turn off an output, use the target value match off instruction
(F167).
Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET/RET instruction.

Setting the system register

In order to use the high−speed counter function, it is necessary to set system registers
400 and 401. For detailed information section ****

9.3.2 Types of Input Modes

Incremental input mode

on
X0
off

Count 0 1 2 3 4 n−3 n−2 n−1 n

Decremental input mode

on
X0
off

Count n n−1 n−2 n−3 n−4 3 2 1 0

9−9
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

2−phase input mode

(Incremental input: CW)
on
X0
off
on
X1
off

Count 0 1 2 n−1 n

(Decremental input: CCW)

on
X0
off
on
X1
off

Count n n−1 n−2 n−3 2 1

Incremental/decremental input mode (separate input mode)

on
X0
off
on
X1 off

Count 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 3

Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing

Directional distinction mode

on
X0
off
on
X1 off

Count 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0

Increasing Decreasing

9 − 10
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

9.3.3 I/O Allocation

The inputting, as shown in the table on section 9.2.1, will differ depending on the
channel number being used.
The output turned on and off can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired with instructions
F166 and F167.
When using CH0 with incremental input and reset input
Count input
X0

Reset input
X2

On and off output

Yn *

* The output turned on and off when values match can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as
desired.
When using CH0 with 2−phase input and reset input
A phase input
X0
B phase input
X1
Reset input
X2

On and off output

Yn *

* The output turned on and off when values match can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as
desired.

9 − 11
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

9.3.4 Instructions Used with High−speed Counter Function

High−speed counter control instruction (F0)

This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable.
Specify this instruction together with the F0 (MV) instruction and the special data
register DT9052/DT90052.
Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is
executed again.
Operations that can be performed with this instruction
Counter software reset.
Count enable/disable.
Hardware reset enable/disable.
Clear controls from high−speed counter instructions F166 to F170.
Clear target value match interrupt.

Example:
Performing a software reset
X7
DF F0 MV, H 1 , DT9052 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ 1

F0 MV, H 0 , DT9052 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ 2

In the above program, the reset is performed in step 1 and 0

is entered just after that in step 2 . The count is now ready for
operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed.
Elapsed value change and read instruction (F1)
This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high−speed counter.
Specify this instruction together with the F1 (DMV) instruction and the special data
register DT9044/DT90044.
The elapsed value is stored as 32−bit data in the combined area of special data
registers DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045.
Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.

Example 1:
Set the initial value of K3000 in the high−speed counter
(example of changing the elapsed value).
X7
DF F1 DMV, K3000, DT9044

9 − 12
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

Example 2:

Reads the elapsed value of the high−speed counter and

copies it to DT100.
X7
DF F1 DMV, DT9044, DT100

Each time the ED instruction is executed, the elapsed value is automatically transferred
from the elapsed value area to the special data registers DT9044 and DT9045/
DT90044 and DT90045.
Target value match on instruction (F166)
XA
DF F166 HC1S, K0, K10000, Y7

If the elapsed value (DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045) for channel 0
matches K10000, output Y7 turns on.

XB
DF F166 HC1S, K2, K20000, Y6

If the elapsed value (DT9104 and DT9105/DT90104 and DT90105) for channel 2
matches K20000, output Y6 turns on.
Target value match off instruction (F167)
XC
DF F167 HC1R, K1, K30000, Y4

If the elapsed value (DT9048 and DT9049/DT90048 and DT90049) for channel 1
matches K30000, output Y4 turns off.

XD
DF F167 HC1R, K3, K40000, Y5

If the elapsed value (DT9108 and DT9109/DT90108 and DT90109) for channel 3
matches K40000, output Y5 turns off.

9 − 13
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

9.3.5 Sample Program

Wiring examples

FP0

Input terminal

X0
Operation
start X5

Encoder COM
input
Encoder
Motor

Output terminal Inverter

Operation Y0 Operation/Stop
+

− COM

Speed

0 5,000
Number of pulse

Y0

9 − 14
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

Positioning operations with a single speed inverter

When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed
value (DT9044 and DT9045) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.

X5 R903A R102 R100

DF Positioning operations running

R100

R100 R101
DF Positioning operations start
R101
F1 DMV, K 0, DT 9044

F167 HC1R, K 0, K 5000, Y0

R101 Y0
S Start signal to inverter
R903A R100 T0 R102
DF/ Completion pulse
(0.5 seconds)
R102 TMX 0, K 5

9 − 15
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

Wiring example

FP0

Input terminal
Encoder
input X0
Operation X5
start
COM

Encoder
Motor

Output terminal
Inverter
High−speed Y0 Run/Stop
switching Y1 Fast/Slow
+
− COM

Speed

0 4,500 5,000
Number of pulse

Y0

Y1

9 − 16
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.3 High−speed Counter Function

Positioning operations with a double speed inverter

When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the
elapsed value (DT9044 and DT9045) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor
begins decelerating. When the elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the
conveyor stops.

X5 R903A R103 R100

DF Positioning operations running

R100

R100 R101
DF Positioning operations start

R101
F1 DMV, K 0, DT 9044

F167 HC1R, K 0, K 5000, Y0

R101 Y0
S Start signal to inverter

Y1
S High−speed signal to inverter

R100
F61 DCMP, K 4500, DT 9044

R100 R900C R102

Reaches deceleration point

R102 Y1
DF R Deceleration

R903A R100 T0 R103

DF/ Completion pulse (0.5 seconds)

R103 TMX 0, K 5

9 − 17
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

9.4 Pulse Output Function

9.4.1 Outline of Pulse Output Function

Instructions used and control settings

The pulse function enables positioning control by use in combination with a
commercially available pulse−string input type motor driver.
Provides trapezoidal control with the instruction F168 for automatically obtaining pulse
outputs by specifying the initial speed, maximum speed, acceleration/deceleration
time, and target value.
Instruction F168 also enables automatic home return.
JOG operation with the instruction F169 for pulse output while the execution condition
(trigger) is in the on state.

Setting the system register

When using the pulse output function, set the channels corresponding to system
registers 400 to “Do not use high−speed counter.”

9 − 18
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

9.4.2 Control Mode

Incremental <relative value control>

Outputs the pulse of the pulse number set by the target value.
By setting H02 (incremental; forward: off; reverse: on) in the control code with
instruction F168, when the target value is positive, the directional output is turned off
and the elapsed value of the high−speed counter increases. When the target value is
negative, the directional output turns on and the elapsed value of the high−speed
counter decreases. By setting H03 in the control code, the directional output is the
reverse of that above.
For detailed information F168 (SPD1) and section 9.4.5

Absolute <absolute value control>

Outputs the pulse set by the difference between the current value and the target value.
(The difference between the current value and the target value is the output pulse
number.)
By setting H12 (absolute; forward: off; reverse: on) in the control code with instruction
F168, when the current value is less than the target value, the directional output is
turned off and the elapsed value of the high−speed counter increases. When the current
value is greater than the target value, the directional output turns on and the elapsed
value of the high−speed counter decreases. By setting H13 in the control code, the
directional output is the reverse of that above.
For detailed information F168 (SPD1) and section 9.4.5

Home return
Until the home input (X0 or X1) is entered by executing instruction F168, the pulse is
continuously output.
To decelerate the movement when near the home, set the bit corresponding to DT9052/
DT90052 to off → on → off → with the near home input.
For detailed information F0 (MV), F168 (SPD1) and section 9.4.5

JOG operation
Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for instruction F169 is in
the on state.
The directional output and output frequency are specified by instruction F169.
For detailed information F169 (PLS) and section 9.4.5

9 − 19
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

9.4.3 I/O Allocation and Wiring

Single pulse input driver (pulse input and directional switching input)
One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a directional
output.
The pulse output terminal, directional output terminal, and home input I/O allocation is
determined by the channel used. For detailed information section 9.2.1
Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact point and turning on
and off the specified bit of DT9052/DT90052.
For detailed information F0 (MV)
Up to two driver systems can be connected.
When using CH0
FP0
Home input
X0
*
X2
Near home
input Driver
Pulse output
Y0
Y2
Directional
switching output

* The near home input specifies the desired input, such as X2.
When using CH1
FP0
Home input
X1
*
X3
Near home
input Driver
Pulse output
Y1
Y3
Directional
switching output

* The near home input specifies the desired input, such as X3.

9 − 20
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Double pulse input driver (CW pulse input and CCW pulse input)
Since a double pulse input is used, switching must be performed by an external relay.
One output contact is used as a pulse output for relay switching.
The pulse output terminal and home input I/O allocation is determined by the channel
used. For detailed information section 9.2.1
Set the control code for instruction F168 to “No directional output.”
For detailed information F168 (SPFD1)

When using CH0

FP0
Home input
X0
*
X2
Near home
input CW Driver
Pulse input
Y0 output

** CCW
Y4 input

* X2 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input.
** Y4 or other desired output can be specified for the relay switching. At this time, the relay
must be switched earlier by the amount of its operation time.

Caution when using a double pulse input driver

When using the FP0 pulse outputs Y0 and Y1 for direct connection to the CW input and
CCW input of a driver, the counter elapsed values for the separate channels (ch0 and
ch1) increase and decrease in response to the individual outputs. The elapsed values
can thus be sent to the program as necessary.
FP0 Driver
CW input
Y0

CCW input
Y1

9 − 21
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

9.4.4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function

Positioning control instruction (F168)

Automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table.
X3
DF F0 MV, H102, DT100

F0 MV, K500, DT101

F0 MV, K5000, DT102

F0 MV, K200, DT103

F1 DMV, K10000, DT104

F0 MV, K0, DT106

F168 SPD1, DT100, H0

Generates a pulse from output Y0 at an initial speed of 500 Hz, a maximum speed of
5000 Hz, an acceleration/deceleration time of 200 ms, and a movement amount of
10000 pulses.
5000 Hz

10000 pulses

500 Hz
0 Hz

200 ms 200 ms

At this time the high−speed counter elapsed value (DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and
DT90045) will be increasing.

Notes

For trapezoidal control, set the initial speed to no more than

5000 Hz.
For details on troubleshooting procedures when no pulse is
output when instruction F168 (SPD1) is executed, refer to page
9 − 32.

9 − 22
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Pulse output instruction (F169)

This instruction is for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when
the execution condition (trigger) turns on.
X2
F0 MV, H112, DT200

F0 MV, K300, DT201

F169 PLS, DT200, H0

While X2 is in the on state, a pulse of 300 Hz with a duty ratio of 10% is output from Y0.
At this time, directional output (Y2) is off and the count of the elapsed value for the
high−speed counter CH0 (DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045) increases.

X6
F0 MV, H123, DT200

F0 MV, K700, DT201

F169 PLS, DT200, H1

While X6 is in the on state, a pulse of 700 Hz with a duty ratio of 10% is output from Y1.
At this time, directional output (Y3) is off and the count of the elapsed value for the
high−speed counter CH1 (DT9048 and DT9049/DT90048 and DT90049) decreases.

High−speed counter control instruction (F0)

This instruction is used for resetting the built−in high−speed counter, stopping the pulse
outputs, and setting and resetting the near home input.
Specify this instruction together with the F0 (MV) instruction and the special data
register DT9052/DT90052.
Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is
executed again.
Operations that can be performed with this instruction
Clear controls (stopping the pulse outputs) from high−speed counter instructions F166
to F170.
Near home processing for home return operations.

9 − 23
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Example 1: Enable the near home input during home return operations and
begin deceleration.
X3
DF F0 MV, H 4 , DT9052 ..... 1

F0 MV, H 0 , DT9052 ..... 2

In the above program, the near home input is enabled in step

1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the
preset operations.

Example 2: Performing a forced stop of the pulse output.

X7
DF F0 MV, H 8 , DT9052

F0 MV, H 0 , DT9052

Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1)

This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built−in high−speed
counter.
Specify this instruction together with the F1 (DMV) instruction and the special data
register DT9044/DT90044.
The elapsed value is stored as 32−bit data in the combined area of special data
registers DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045.
Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.

Example 1: Set the initial value of K3000 in the high−speed counter (example
of writing the elapsed value).
X7
DF F1 DMV, K3000, DT9044

Example 2: Reads the elapsed value of the high−speed counter to DT100.

X7
DF F1 DMV, DT9044, DT100

Each time the ED instruction is executed, the elapsed value is automatically transferred
from the elapsed value area to the special data registers DT9044 and
DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045.

9 − 24
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

9.4.5 Sample Program for Positioning Control

Wiring example
FP0
Input terminal
Home sensor X0

Positioning start X1

Positioning start X2

Home return start X3

Near home sensor X4

Forward JOG start X5

Reverse JOG start X6

Overrun X7

COM a contact

b contact a contact b contact

Stepping motor Moving table
(− side) (+ side)

Stepping motor driver

Output
terminal COM
Pulse output Y0 Pulse input

COM

Directional output Y2 Directional

input

+
See
note.
−
24 V DC
power supply

Note
When the stepping motor input is a 5 V photo−coupler type,
connect a 2 KΩ 1/4 W resistor.

9 − 25
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Relative value positioning operation (plus direction)

When X1 turns on, a pulse is output from Y0. At this time, directional output Y2 does
not turn on.
X1 R903A R12 R10
DF Positioning operations running
R10

R10 R11
DF Positioning operations start
R11
DT100 Control code: H102
F0 MV, H 102, DT 100
[refer to “instruction
F0 MV, K 500, DT 101 F168 (SPD1)”]
DT101 Initial speed: 500 Hz
F0 MV, K5000, DT 102
DT102 Maximum speed:
F0 MV, K 200, DT 103 5000 Hz
F1 DMV, K10000, DT 104 DT103 Acceleration/decelera-
tion time: 200 ms
F0 MV, K 0, DT 106 DT104 Movement amount:
DT105 10000 pls
F168 SPD1, DT 100, H0
DT106 Pulse stop
R903A R10 T0 R12
DF/ Positioning completion pulse (1 s)
R12 TMX 0, K10

5000 Hz
(− side) (+ side)
Motor 10000 pulses
10000
pulses

500 Hz
0 Hz

200 ms 200 ms

9 − 26
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Relative value positioning operation (minus direction)

When X2 turns on, a pulse is output from Y0. At this time, directional output Y2 turns
on.
X2 R903A R22 R20
DF Positioning operations running
R20

R20 R21
DF Positioning operations start
R21
DT100 Control code: H102
F0 MV, H 102, DT 100
[refer to “instruction
F0 MV, K1000, DT 101 F168 (SPD1)”]
DT101 Initial speed: 1000 Hz
F0 MV, K6000, DT 102
DT102 Maximum speed:
F0 MV, K 300, DT 103 6000 Hz
F1 DMV, K−8000, DT 104 DT103 Acceleration/decelera-
tion time: 300 ms
F0 MV, K 0, DT 106 DT104 Movement amount:
DT105 −8000 pls
F168 SPD1, DT 100, H0
DT106 Pulse stop
R903A R20 T1 R22
DF/ Positioning completion pulse (1 s)
R22 TMX 1, K10

6000 Hz
(− side) (+ side)
Motor 8000 pulses
8000
pulses

1000 Hz
0 Hz

300 ms 300 ms

9 − 27
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Absolute value positioning operation

When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from Y0. If the current value at that point is
larger than ”22,000”, the direction output Y2 goes on, and if the value is smaller than
”22,000”, the direction output Y2 does not go on.
X1 R903A R32 R30
DF Positioning operations running
R30

R30 R31
DF Positioning operations start
R31
DT100 Control code: H112
F0 MV, H 112, DT 100
[refer to “instruction
F0 MV, K 200, DT 101 F168 (SPD1)”]
DT101 Initial speed: 200 Hz
F0 MV, K4000, DT 102
DT102 Maximum speed:
F0 MV, K 250, DT 103 4000 Hz
F1 DMV, K22000, DT 104 DT103 Acceleration/decelera-
tion time: 250 ms
F0 MV, K 0, DT 106 DT104
Target value: 22000
DT105
F168 SPD1, DT 100, H0
DT106 Pulse stop
R903A R30 T2 R32
DF/ Positioning completion pulse (1 s)
R32 TMX 2, K10

(− side) (+ side)

Motor

(10,000) 22,000 (30,000)

4000 Hz
Regardless of the current value, its movement
is towards position “22,000.”

200 Hz
0 Hz

250 ms 250 ms

9 − 28
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Home return operation (minus direction)

When X3 turns on, a pulse is output from Y0 and the return to home begins. At this time,
directional output Y2 turns on. Then, when X4 turns on, deceleration begins, and when
X0 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the
elapsed value (DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045) are cleared to 0.
X3 R903A R42 R40
DF Home return operations running
R40

R40 R41
DF Home return operation start
R41
DT200 Control code: H123
F0 MV, H 123, DT 200
[refer to “instruction
F0 MV, K 100, DT 201 F168 (SPD1)”]
DT201 Initial speed: 100 Hz
F0 MV, K2000, DT 202
DT202 Maximum speed:
F0 MV, K 150, DT 203 2000 Hz

F168 SPD1, DT 200, H0

DT203 Acceleration/decelera-
tion time: 150 ms
R903A R40 T3 R42
DF/ Home return completion pulse
R42 TMX 3, K10

X4
DF F0 MV, H 4, DT9052 Near home deceleration start
F0 MV, H 0, DT9052

Near home
sensor Home sensor
(− side) (+ side) X3: on X4: on X0: on

Motor
2000 Hz

100 Hz
0 Hz
X0 X4
Home Near 150 ms 150 ms
sensor home
sensor

9 − 29
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Home return operation (plus direction)

When X3 turns on, a pulse is output from Y0 and the return to home begins. At this time,
directional output Y2 does not turn on. Then, when X4 turns on, deceleration begins,
and when X0 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed,
the elapsed value (DT9044 and DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045) are cleared to 0.
X3 R903A R52 R50
DF Home return operations running
R50

R50 R51
DF Home return operation start
R51
DT200 Control code: H122
F0 MV, H 122, DT 200
[refer to “instruction
F0 MV, K 120, DT 201 F168 (SPD1)”]
DT201 Initial speed: 120 Hz
F0 MV, K2500, DT 202
DT202 Maximum speed:
F0 MV, K 100, DT 203 2500 Hz
F168 SPD1, DT 200, H0 DT203 Acceleration/decelera-
tion time: 100 ms
R903A R50 T4 R52
DF/ Home return completion pulse
R52 TMX 4, K10

X4
DF F0 MV, H 4, DT9052 Near home deceleration start
F0 MV, H 0, DT9052

Near home
sensor Home sensor
(− side) (+ side) X3: on X4: on X0: on

Motor
2500 Hz

120 Hz
0 Hz
X4 X0
Near Home 100 ms 100 ms
home sensor
sensor

9 − 30
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.4 Pulse Output Function

JOG operation (plus direction)

While X5 is in the on state, a pulse is output from Y0. At this time, directional output Y2
does not turn on.
X5
F0 MV, H 112, DT 300
DT300 Control code: H112
F0 MV, K 300, DT 301
[refer to “instruction
F169 (PLS)”]
F169 PLS, DT 300, H0 DT301 Speed: 300 Hz

(− side) (+ side) on
X5
off
Motor
300 Hz
Y0(Pulse)
0 Hz

JOG operation (minus direction)

While X6 is in the on state, a pulse is output from Y0. At this time, directional output Y2
turns on.
X6
F0 MV, H 122, DT 310
DT310 Control code: H122
F0 MV, K 300, DT 311
[refer to “instruction
F169 (PLS)”]
F169 PLS, DT 310, H0 DT311 Speed: 300 Hz

(− side) (+ side) on
X6
off
Motor
300 Hz
Y0(Pulse)
0 Hz

Emergency stop (over limit)

If X7 turns off while a pulse is being output from Y0, the output of the pulse is stopped.
X7
DF/ F0 MV, H 8, DT9052
Pulse output control clear
F0 MV, H 0, DT9052

9 − 31
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.4 Pulse Output Function

Troubleshooting flowchart if a pulse is not output when instruction F168

(SPD1) executed
Yes
Error occurs

No

[F168 SPD1, ϕ , Kϕ ]
Special internal
Yes Remedy
Remedy Yes problem
relay R903A or R903B
problem is already on. Not set to K0 or K1.

No No

Control clear
Remedy Yes flag for special data regis- First word
problem ter DT9052/DT90052 of data table is not set Yes Remedy
is on. to incremental (0), absolute problem
(1), or home
No return (2).

No
Remedy Yes HSC CH0 or CH1
is set to system
problem register 400.
Second word of
No data table is set to 40 < No Remedy
or = initial speed < or = problem
maximum
Elapsed value speed.
Modify Yes tried to output pulse in
elapsed Yes
forward direction at
value. H7FFFFF.

No
Fifth word of data
table is set to HFF8000 < or = No Remedy
target value < or = problem
Modify Elapsed value
Yes H7FFFFF.
tried to output pulse in
elapsed reverse direction at
value. HFF8000. Yes

No
Please contact your dealer.

Set to home Yes

return mode

No Home input is
already used by
Yes Remedy
interrupt or HSC. problem

No
Please contact your dealer.
Set to absolute Yes
mode

No Absolute mode Yes Remedy

setting is target value
= elapsed problem
Please contact your dealer. value.

No
Please contact your dealer.

9 − 32
FP0 High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output

9.5 PWM Output Function

9.5 PWM Output Function

9.5.1 Outline of PWM Output Function

PWM output function

With the instruction F170 (PWM), the specified duty ratio and pulse width modulation
is obtained.
Applicable to analog controls such as temperature control and light modulation.
Setting the system register
When using the PWM output function, set the channels corresponding to system
registers 400 to “Do not use high−speed counter.”

9.5.2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function

PWM output instruction (F170)

X6
F0 MV, H5, DT100

F0 MV, K500, DT101

F170 PWM, DT100, K0

While X6 is in the on state, a pulse with a period of 840 ms and duty ratio of 50% is output
from Y0.

X7
F0 MV, H6, DT100

F0 MV, K300, DT101

F170 PWM, DT100, K1

While X7 is in the on state, a pulse with a period of 1.6 s and duty ratio of 30% is output
from Y1.

9 − 33
High−speed Counter/Pulse Output/ PWM Output FP0

9.5 PWM Output Function

9 − 34
Chapter 10
General−use Serial Communications

10.1 General−use Serial Communications Function . . . . 10 − 3

10.1.1 General−use Serial Communications . . . . . 10 − 3
10.1.2 Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 3
10.1.3 Data Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 4

10.2 System Register Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 5

10.3 Operations When Using General−use Serial

Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 8
10.3.1 If “None” is Set for Start and Terminal
Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 8
10.3.2 If “Yes” has been Set for the Start and
Terminal Codes (Start Code: STX, Terminal
Code: ETX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 9
General−use Serial Communications FP0

10 − 2
FP0 General−use Serial Communications

10.1 General−use Serial Communications Function

10.1 General−use Serial Communications Function

10.1.1 General−use Serial Communications

Using the RS232C port, data and commands can be sent to and received from an
external device such as a bar code reader. This is done by executing the F144 (TRNS)
instruction.
Transmission and reception are not enabled in the default settings, so system register
412 must be changed to a general−use port (K2).
The transmission speed (baud rate) and transmission format are set using system
register 413 and 414.

10.1.2 Data Transmission

Any desired data register can be prepared as the transmission table, and the data
stored in that table transmitted.
Start and terminal codes are automatically added to the data being transmitted, and the
data is sent. (For details, see “F144 (TRNS)” instruction.)
The data register to be used as the transmission table is specified using the F144
(TRNS) instruction.
Data transmission is executed using the F144 (TRNS) instruction.
There is no restriction on the number of bytes that can be transmitted. Any number of
bytes may be sent, as long as it does not exceed the range that can be used by the data
register.

Table for transmission

Transmission

Transmitted data
storage area

External device
(PC, etc.)

10 − 3
General−use Serial Communications FP0

10.1 General−use Serial Communications Function

10.1.3 Data Reception

Data sent from an external device is received at the RS232C port.

The received data is automatically stored in the data register specified as the reception
buffer. (For details see “F144 (TRNS)” instruction.)
Data registers used as reception buffers are specified by system register 417 and 418.
Data reception is enabled by the F144 (TRNS) instruction.

Reception buffer

Reception
Received data
storage area

External device
(bar code reader, etc.)

10 − 4
FP0 General−use Serial Communications

10.2 System Register Settings

10.2 System Register Settings

Preparation for Sending and Receiving Data (System Register Settings)

Communication is not enabled in the default settings for the RS232C port. To enable
communication, the items outlined below must be specified, using the system registers.
− Usage purpose of the RS232C port
− RS232C transmission format
− Baud rate
− Reception buffer

Setting the Usage Purpose of the RS232C Port (System Register 412)
Specify “General−use port” (this is K2 for the FP Programmer II). This is the setting
which enables serial communication.

Setting the RS232C Transmission Format (System Register 413)

The transmission format is as follows in the default settings. (With the FP Programmer
II, this is H3.)
Data length: 8 bits
Parity check: Yes/odd
Stop bit: 1 bit
Terminal code: CR
Start code: STX None

Set these items to match the external device connected to the RS232C port, and if
changing the transmission format, enter settings for the pertinent individual items.
With the FP Programmer II, the various items should be selected in bit units, as shown
below, and settings entered using H constants.
15 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Start code 0:STX None

1:STX Yes

Terminal code 00:CR 01:CR and LF

10: None 11:ETX

Stop bit 0:1 bit

1:2 bits

Parity 00: None 01: Yes (odd)

11: Yes (even)

Data length 0:7 bits 1:8 bits

next page

10 − 5
General−use Serial Communications FP0

10.2 System Register Settings

Start codes (STX) and terminal codes (EXT)

When data is transmitted, the specified code is added automatically to the data being
sent. When receiving data, if ”Yes” has been specified for the start code parameter, data
following the start code is stored in the reception buffer. Also, at the point at which the
terminal code is received, the reception completed flag (R9038) goes on. The start and
terminal codes themselves are not stored in the reception buffer, however. For details,
see section 10.3.2.

Note
If no terminal codes are specified for either transmission or
reception, the reception completed flag will not go on. In this
case, watch the number of bytes received to determine whether
the reception has been completed.

Example: Changing the terminal code to [CR and LF]

10 − 6
FP0 General−use Serial Communications

10.2 System Register Settings

Setting the Baud Rate (System Register 414)

The baud rate (transmission speed) for general−use serial communication is set to
“9600 bps” (H1) in the default settings.
To change this setting to match the external device connected to the RS232C port,
select one of the values listed below.
H 0 0

Tool port RS232C port

H0: 9600 bps H0: 19200 bps
H1: 19200 bps H1: 9600 bps
H2: 4800 bps
If anything other than H0 or H3: 2400 bps
H1 is set for the baud rate of H4: 1200 bps
tool port, the baud rate will H5: 600 bps
be 9600 bps. H6: 300 bps

Example: Setting 19,200 bps for both the tool port and RS232C port
∋ Write H100.

Setting the Reception Buffer (System Registers 417 and 418)

In the default settings, all areas of the data registers are set to be used as reception
buffers. To change the area of the data register used as the reception buffer, specify the
initial number in system register 417, and the volume (number of words) in system
register 418.
The reception buffer is configured as shown below.

Initial area specified with Number of

system register 417 reception bytes

Received data Number of words specified

storage area by system register 418

10 − 7
General−use Serial Communications FP0

10.3 Operations When Using General−use Serial Communication

10.3 Operations When Using General−use Serial

Communication

10.3.1 If “None” is Set for Start and Terminal Codes

Relationship between the flags (reception completed flag and

transmission completed flag) and the F144 (TRNS) instruction
External received A B C CR D E F G
data
Cannot be stored when
reception completed
flag is on
on
R9038
Reception
completed flag off

F144 (TRNS) on
Duplex transmission dis-
instruction abled while F144 (TRNS) in-
execution off struction is being executed
on
R9039
Transmission
completed flag off

Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR

Stored

Reception A A A A E E E
buffer B B B B F B
C C C C G

Number of recep- <1> <2> <3> <0> <1> <2> <3>

tion bytes
Write pointer Number of bytes received is
cleared when F144 (TRNS)
instruction is executed

Half−duplex transmission should be used for general−use serial communication.

Reception is disabled when the reception completed flag (R9038) is on.
Be aware that the reception completed flag (R9038) changes even while a scan is in
progress. (Example: If the reception completed flag is used multiple times as an input
condition, there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan.)
When the F144 (TRNS) instruction is executed, the error flag (R9037), reception
completed flag (R9038) and transmission completed flag (R9039) go off.
Duplex transmission is disabled while the F144 (TRNS) instruction is being executed.
Check the transmission completed flag (R9039) to determine whether duplex
transmission is possible.

10 − 8
FP0 General−use Serial Communications

10.3 Operations When Using General−use Serial Communication

When the F144 (TRNS) instruction is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared,
and the address (write pointer) returns to the initial address in the reception buffer.
Reception stops if the error flag (R9037) goes on. To resume reception, execute the
F144 (TRNS) instruction. This turns off the error flag, and transmits both actual and
empty data.

10.3.2 If “Yes” has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes
(Start Code: STX, Terminal Code: ETX)

When receiving data

External
received A B C STX D E ETX F G STX H ETX
data
Cannot be The reception
stored when code is deleted
reception by the F144
on
completed (TRNS) instruc-
R9038 flag is on tion.
Reception com-
off
pleted flag
on The reception com-
F144 (TRNS) pleted flag is
instruction turned off by ex-
off ecuting the F144
execution
(TRNS) instruction.

Stored

Reception A A A A D D D D G G H H
buffer B B B B E E E E E E E
C C C C C C C C C C

Number of recep- <1> <2> <3> <0> <1> <2> <2> <0> <1> <0> <1> <1>
tion bytes Number of Number of bytes Number of
Write pointer
bytes received received is cleared bytes received
is cleared when when F144 (TRNS) is cleared when
start code is instruction is ex- start code is
received. ecuted. received.

The data is stored in the reception buffer in sequential order, but at the point at which
the start code is received, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address
(write pointer) is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer.
When the F144 (TRNS) instruction is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared,
and the address (write pointer) is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer.
If there are two start codes, data following the later start code is overwritten and stored
in the reception buffer.
Reception is disabled while the reception completed flag (R9038) is on.
The reception completed flag (R9038) is turned off by the F144 (TRNS) instruction.
Because of this, if the F144 (TRNS) instruction is executed at the same time that the
terminal code is received, the reception completed flag will not be detected.

10 − 9
General−use Serial Communications FP0

10.3 Operations When Using General−use Serial Communication

When sending data

Transmitted data STX a b ETX STX c d e ETX

Transmission Transmission

on
R9039
Transmission
completed flag
off

on
Duplex transmission
F144 (TRNS) in- disabled while F144
struction execution off (TRNS) instruction is
being executed

Send buffer a a a a c c c c c
b b b b d d d d d
e e e e e

Number of bytes not yet sent <2> <1> <0> <0> <3> <2> <1> <0> <0>

Transmission point

Start codes (STX) and terminal codes (ETX) are automatically added to the data being
transmitted, and the data is transmitted to an external device. (For information on start
and terminal code settings, see section 10.2.)
Executing the F144 (TRNS) instruction turns off the transmission completed flag
(R9039).
Duplex transmission is disabled while the F144 (TRNS) instruction is being executed.
Check the transmission completed flag (R9039) to determine whether duplex
transmission is possible.

10 − 10
Chapter 11
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

11.1 Self-Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 3

11.1.1 Allowing Duplicated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 4
11.1.2 Continuing After an Operation Error . . . . . . . 11 − 4

11.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 5
11.2.1 ERROR/ALARM LED is Blinking . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 5
11.2.2 ERROR/ALARM LED is ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 7
11.2.3 All LEDs are OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 7
11.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 8
11.2.5 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed . . . . . . . . 11 − 10
11.2.6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 − 10
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FP0

11 − 2
FP0 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

11.1 Self-Diagnostic Function

11.1 Self-Diagnostic Function

The FP0 control unit has a self-diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops
operation if necessary. When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator LEDs
on the FP0 control unit vary, as shown in the table.

Status
indicator
LEDs

LED status Program

Condition Description execution
RUN PROG. ERROR/ALARM status
Normal operation in RUN
ON OFF OFF Operation
mode
Normal
No al Normal operation in PROG.
condition OFF ON OFF Stop
mode
Blink OFF OFF Forcing ON/OFF in RUN mode Operation
ON OFF Blink When a self-diagnostic error Operation
Abnormal OFF ON Blink occurs Stop
condition When a system watchdog
Varies Varies ON Stop
timer error occurs

Normally, if an error occurs, operation of FP0 stops.

The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped if a duplicate
output error or operation error occurs, by setting the system registers. You can set the
system registers with TOOL software.

11 − 3
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FP0

11.1 Self-Diagnostic Function

11.1.1 Allowing Duplicated Output

When you change system register 20 settings (“ENAB”) using the programming
software, duplicated output is not regarded as an error and the FP0 continues to
operate.

11.1.2 Continuing After an Operation Error

When you change system register 26 settings (“CONT”) using the programming
software, the FP0 continues to operate. In this case, even if the FP0 continues to
operate, this is regarded as an error.

11 − 4
FP0 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

11.2 Troubleshooting

11.2 Troubleshooting

11.2.1 ERROR/ALARM LED is Blinking

<Condition>
The self-diagnostic error occurs.

<Procedure 1 >
Check the error code using the programming tool.

Using FPWIN GR
In the ONLINE mode, select “Monitor” from the menu bar of FPWIN GR. And
then select “Status Display”. At the “PLC Error Flag” field, self-diagnostic error
code is displayed.
Using FP programmer II
(−) READ
Press the keys on the FP programmer II ACLR
OP
1 1 0 ENT

as shown on the right.

When self-diagnostic error occurs, the OP− 110
screen shown on the right is displayed. FUNCTION ERR E45

Error code is 1 to 9
<Condition>
There is a syntax error in the program.

<Procedure 1 >
Change to PROG. mode and clear the error.

<Procedure 2>
Execute a total-check function to determine the location of the syntax error.

Refer to your software manual, for details about the total-check method.
. next page

11 − 5
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FP0

11.2 Troubleshooting

Error code is 20 or higher

<Condition>
A self-diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred.

<Procedure 1 >
Use the programming tool in PROG. mode to clear the error.

Using FPWIN GR
Click the “Clear Error” button in the status display menu described on the previ-
ous page.
Using FP programmer II
Press the keys as shown on the right.
Error code 43 and higher can be cleared.
In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned OFF and then ON
again to clear the error, but all of the contents of the operation memory
except hold type data are cleared.
An error can also be cleared by executing a self−diagnostic error set
instruction F148 (ERR).

<Procedure 2 >
Follow the procedures described in the table of error codes.

Note
When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at
which the error occurred is stored in special data registers
DT9017 and DT9018. If this happens, monitor the address at
which the error occurred before cancelling the error.

11 − 6
FP0 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

11.2 Troubleshooting

11.2.2 ERROR/ALARM LED is ON

<Condition>
The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of FP0 has been
stopped.

<Procedure 1 >
Set the mode switch from RUN to PROG. and turn the power OFF and then ON.

If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned ON again, there is probably an abnormality

in the FP0. Please contact your dealer.
If the ERROR/ALARM LED is blinked, go to section 11.2.1.

<Procedure 2 >
Set the mode switch from PROG. to RUN.

If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned ON , the program execution time is too long.
Check:
If instructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way
that a scan can never finish.
that interrupt instructions are executed in succession.

11.2.3 All LEDs are OFF

<Procedure 1 >
Check the power supply wiring.

<Procedure 2>
Check if the power supplied to the FP0 control unit is in the range of the rating.
Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply.
<Procedure 3>
Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the
FP0 control unit is shared with them.

If the LEDs on the FP0 control unit turn ON at this moment, the capacity of the
power supply is not enough to control other devices as well.
Prepare another power supply for other devices or increase the capacity of the
power supply.

11 − 7
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FP0

11.2 Troubleshooting

11.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction

Check of output condition (output indicator LEDs are ON)

<Procedure 1 >
Check the wiring of the loads.

<Procedure 2>
Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads.

If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in

the load. Check the load again.
If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the
FP0’s output circuit. Please contact your dealer.

Check of output condition (output indicator LEDs are OFF)

<Procedure 1 >
Monitor the output condition using a programming tool.

If the output monitored is turned ON, there is probably a duplicated output error.

<Procedure 2>
Forcing ON the output using a programming tool.

If the output indicator LED is turned ON, go to input condition check.

If the output indicator LED remains OFF, there is probably an abnormality in the
FP0’s output circuit. Please contact your dealer.

11 − 8
FP0 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

11.2 Troubleshooting

Check of input condition (input indicator LEDs are OFF)

<Procedure 1 >
Check the wiring of the input devices.

<Procedure 2>
Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals.

If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnor-
mality in the FP0’s input circuit. Please contact your dealer.
If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an
abnormality in the input device or input power supply. Check the input device and
input power supply.

Check of input condition (input indicator LEDs are ON)

<Procedure >
Monitor the input condition using a programming tool.

If the input monitored is OFF, there is probably an abnormality in the FP0’s input
circuit. Please contact your dealer.
If the input monitored is ON, check the program again.
Also, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two-wire type sensor)
and check for the duplicated use of output or the program flow when a control in-
struction such as MC or JP is used.
Check the settings of the I/O allocation.

11 − 9
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FP0

11.2 Troubleshooting

11.2.5 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed

When a password is set for the programmable controller

<Procedure >
Enter a password in the password setting menu in the FPWIN GR software and se-
lect enable.

1. In the menu select [Tool (T)] and then [Set PLC Password (P)].
2. The PLC password setting dialog box appears, shown below. Select the
[Access] radio button, enter the password, and then click the [Settings] button.

11.2.6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN

<Condition>
A syntax error has occurred.

<Procedure >
Execute a total-check function to determine the location of the syntax error.

Refer to your software manual, for details about the total-check method.

11 − 10
Chapter 12
Specifications

12.1 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 3

12.2 I/O Allocation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 7

12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 10

12.4 FP0−SL1 S−LINK Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 12

12.5 Specification: Power Supply Unit I/O Link Unit . . . . 12 − 13

12.5.1 FP0 Power Supply Unit (AFP0634) . . . . . 12 − 13
12.5.2 FP0 I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 − 13
Specifications FP0

12 − 2
FP0 Specifications

12.1 Performance Specifications

12.1 Performance Specifications

Item Relay output type Transistor output type S−LINK
type
C10RS/ C14RS/ C16T/ C32T/ T32C SL1
C10RM/ C14RM/ C16P/ C32P/
C10CRS/ C14CRS/ C16CT/ C32CT/
C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP
Programming method/Control method Relay symbol/Cyclic operation
Controllable I/O Basic unit Total: 10 Total: 14 Total: 16 Total: 32 Total: 32 Max. 128
points Input: 6 Input: 8 Input: 8 Input: 16 Input: 16 Input: 64
Output: 4 Output: 6 Output: 8 Output: 16 Output: 16 Output: 64
at S−LINK
block
With expansion Max. 58 Max. 62 Max. 112 Max. 128 Max. 128 Max. 96
unit 1 at
When confi- expansion
gured with block
same output
type as control
unit
With expansion Max. 106 Max. 110 Max. 112 Max. 128 Max. 128
unit 2
When relays
and transistors
are mixed
Program memory Built−in memory Built in EEPROM (without battery)
Program capacity 2,720 steps 5,000 10,000 5,000 steps
steps steps
Numbers of Basic 83
i t
instruction
ti High-level 145
Operation speed 0.9µs/step (by basic instruction)
I/O refresh and base time With no expansion board: 0.3ms
With expansion board(s): 0.3ms and (1 x number of expansion boards) ms
Operation Relay Internal relay (R) 1,008 points (R0 to R62F) 1,008 1,008
memory points (R0 points (R0
points to R62F) to R62F)
(* Note 1)
Special internal 64 points (R9000 to R903F)
relay (R)
Timer/Counter 144 points (initial setting is 100 timer points, T0 to T99 / 44 counter
(T/C) points, C100 to C143 (* Note 2))
Timer range: 1ms, 10ms, 100ms, 1s; selected by instruction
Memory Data register 1,660 words (DT0 to DT1659) 6,144 16,384 6,144
area (DT) words words words
(DT0 to (DT0 to (DT0 to
DT6143) DT16383) DT6143)
(* Note 1)
Special data 112 words (DT9000 to DT9111) 112 words 112 words
register (DT) (DT90000 (DT9000
to to
DT90111) DT9111)
Index register 2 words
(IX, IY)
Differential points (DF, DF/) Unlimited of points
Master control relay points (MCR) 32 points
Number of labels (JP and LOOP) 64 labels 255 labels 64 labels

12 − 3
Specifications FP0

12.1 Performance Specifications

Item Relay output type Transistor output type S−LINK

type
C10RS/ C14RS/ C16T/ C32T/ T32C SL1
C10RM/ C14RM/ C16P/ C32P/
C10CRS/ C14CRS/ C16CT/ C32CT/
C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP
Number of step ladders 128 stages 704 stages 128
(* Note 1) stages
Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100 sub- 16 sub-
routines routines
Number of interrupt programs 7 programs (external 6 points, internal 1 point) 1 program
(internal 1
point)
Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, program syntax check
Clock/calender function Not available Available Not
(* Note 3) available
Special Pulse catch input Total 6 points Not
functions X0 to X1: 50 µs available
Interrupt input
X2 to X5: 100 µs
RS232C port Transmission speeds: 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200bit/s
(* Note 4) Transmission distance: 3m/9.84ft.
(Only units with an Terminal block: 3−pin, made by phoenix Contact Co.
RS232C port) (products number: MKDS1/3−3.5)
Communication method: Half−duplex
Periodical interrupt 0.5ms to 30s interval
Constant scan Available
Password Available
High- speed counter Counter mode: Not
function available
Addition/subtraction (one phase) (* Note 7)
(* Note 5)
− Input point number:
Four channels maximum
− Maximum counting speed:
10kHz maximum for all 4 channels
− Input contacts used:
X0: count input (ch 0) X3: count input (ch 2)
X1: count input (ch 1) X4: count input (ch 3)
X2: reset input (*Note 8) X5: reset input (*Note 8)
− Minimum input pulse width:
X0, X1 50 µs, <10kHz>
X3, X4 100 µs, <5kHz>
Counter mode: Not
Two−phase/individual/direction decision (two−phase) available

− Input point number:

Two channels maximum
− Maximum counting speed:
2kHz maximum for all 2 channels
− Input contacts used:
X0: count input (ch 0) X3: count input (ch 2)
X1: count input (ch 0) X4: count input (ch 2)
X2: reset input X5: reset input
− Minimum input pulse width:
X0, X1 50 µs, <10kHz>
X3, X4 100 µs, <5kHz>

12 − 4
FP0 Specifications

12.1 Performance Specifications

Item Relay output type Transistor output type S−LINK

type
C10RS/ C14RS/ C16T/ C32T/ T32C SL1
C10RM/ C14RM/ C16P/ C32P/
C10CRS/ C14CRS/ C16CT/ C32CT/
C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP
Special Pulse Output Not available
functions output Two independent points (Y0 and Not
point
function Y1)(no interpolation function) available
number
(* N
Note
t Output Not available 40Hz to 10kHz (Y0/Y1: one−point Not
6,10) frequency output) available
40Hz to 5kHz (Y0/Y1: two−point
output)
PWM out- Output Not available Two points (Y0 and Y1) Not
put func- point available
tion number
(* N
Note 6) Output Not available Frequency: 0.15Hz to Fre- Not
frequency 38Hz, quency: available
(* Note 9) 0.15Hz to
Duty: 0.1% to 99.9% 1KHz
Duty:
0.1% to
99.9%
Memory Program and system EEPROM
backup register
(* Note 6)
(* Note 12) Operation memory Areas which are held if the power Areas The oper- Areas
supply fails are fixed, and are which are ation mem- which are
retained by the EEPROM. held if the ory is held if the
power sup- backed up power sup-
− Number of points/words of the ply fails are using built− ply fails are
fixed hold areas in the various fixed, and in charge- fixed, and
memories are able (sec- are
Counters: 4 points retained by ondary ) retained by
Internal relays: 32 points the battery, so the
Date registers: 8 words EEPROM. the hold EEROM.
(* Note 13) − Number type mem- − Number
of points/ ory areas of points/
words of can be words of
the fixed specified the fixed
hold areas using the hold areas
in the program- in the
various ming tools. various
memories (* Note 11) memories
Counters: Counters:
16 points − Memory 16 points
areas
Internal re- which can Internal re-
lays: 128 be speci- lays: 128
points fied: points
Date Timers, Date
registers: Counters, registers:
32 words Internal re- 32 words
(* Note 14) lays, Data (* Note 14)
registers
Backup by the Available for all data registers
F12/F13 instruction

next page

Notes

1) Hold or non−hold type can be set using the system registers.

12 − 5
Specifications FP0

12.1 Performance Specifications

2) The proportion of timer points to counter points can be

changed using a system register 5.
3) Precision of calender timer:
At 0 C/32 F, less than 139 second error per month.
At 25 C/77 F, less than 72 seconds error per month.
At 55 C/131 F, less than 169 seconds error per month.
This accuracy is considered to be the worst fluctuation
coefficient value based on fluctuations in the normal voltage of
5V and the battery backup voltage of 3V. Also, F157 and F158
(time/date addition and subtraction instructions) cannot be
used.
4) Although it has adequate tolerance noise, it is recommendable
to make the user program to execute retransmission (in order
to improve reliability of the communication when a
communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when
a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily.) The
driver IC for the RS232C is in full conformance with
EIA/TIA−232E and CCITT V.28 standards.
5) The combinations 1 phase × 2 channels and 2 phases × 1
channel are also possible for the high−speed counter.
6) The internal relay, data register, and timer/counter hold areas
of the T32CT control unit (10 k step type) can be changed by
the system registers. The number of points in the table is the
value when the system registers are initial values.
7) The max. counting speed (10kHz) is the counting speed with a
rated input voltage of 24V DC and an ambient temperature of
25°C. The counting speed (frequency) will decrease depending
on the voltage and temperature.
8) If both reset inputs X0 and X1 are reset, X2 will be the reset
input of X1. In the same way, for X3 and X4, X5 acts as the
reset input of X4.
9) With a CPU of Ver. 1.2 or a subsequent version, the frequency
will be 0.15Hz to 1kHz.
10) The maximum is 9.5kHz when the positioning control
instruction (F168) is executed.
11) Precautions when using the battery backup function
Secondary (chargeable) battery is used as backup battery in
the FP0 T32C control unit. The battery is not charged before
the unit is shipped, so please make sure that the built−in
backup battery have been charged before using the unit.
12) The program, system registers and the hold type areas
(internal relay, data register and counter) are backed up by
the built in EEPROM.

12 − 6
FP0 Specifications

12.1 Performance Specifications

Notes

13) The possible number of write times by the EEP−ROM write

instruction is 100,000 or less.
14) The possible number of write times by the EEP−ROM write
instruction is 10,000 or less.
15) If the power supply is turned off while the P13 instruction is
being executed, the data written by the P13 instruction may
not be written in the EEPROM properly. Also, the area where
the internal relays, data registers and timer/counter are held
may not be held properly. Do not turn off the power supply
while the P13 instruction is being executed.

12 − 7
Specifications FP0

12.2 I/O Allocation Table

12.2 I/O Allocation Table

FP0 Control Units

The I/O allocation of the FP0 control unit is fixed.
Type of Control Unit I/O number
C10 series Input: 6 points X0 to X5
Output: 4 points Y0 to Y3
C14 series Input: 8 points X0 to X7
Output: 6 points Y0 to Y5
C16 series Input: 8 points X0 to X7
Output: 8 points Y0 to Y7
C32/T32
/ series Input: 16 points X0 to XF
Output: 16 points Y0 to YF

S−LINK Control Units

The I/O allocation of the S−LINK control unit is fixed.
Unit FP0 I/O S−LINK address
Input:
p 64 p
points X80 to X8F 0 to 15
X90 to X9F 16 to 31
X100 to X10F 32 to 47
X110 to X11F 48 to 63
Output:
p 64 p
points Y80 to Y8F 64 to 79
Y90 to Y9F 80 to 95
Y100 to Y10F 96 to 111
Y110 to Y11F 112 to 127

FP0 Expansion Units

The I/O allocation of the FP0 expansion unit is determined by order of connection.
Type
yp of Expansion
p Unit I/O number
First expansion Second Third expansion
expansion
E8X Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
E8R Input: 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63
Output: 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63
E8YR/E8YT/E8YP Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E16X Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
E16R/E16T/E16P
/ / Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E16YT/E16YP Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
E32T/E32P
/ Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F

12 − 8
FP0 Specifications

12.2 I/O Allocation Table

Analog I/O Unit

The I/O allocations of the analog I/O unit are determined by the position at which the unit
is installed.
Type First expansion Second Third expansion
expansion
A21 Input: CH0 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6
(X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
Input: CH1 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7
(X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
Output: 16 points WY2 WY4 WY6
(Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)

A/D Converter Unit and Thermocouple Unit

The data of each channel switches and then reads or writes by the user program which
contains the conversion data switch flag.
Type First expansion Second Third expansion
expansion
A80, Input: CH0, 2, 4, 6 WX2 WX4 WX6
TC4, 16 points (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)

TC8 Input: CH1, 3, 5, 7 WX3 WX5 WX7

16 points (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)

D/A Converter Unit

The data of each channel switches and then reads or writes by the user program which
contains the conversion data switch flag.
Type First expansion Second Third expansion
expansion
A04V Input: 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6
A04I (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
Output: CH0, 2, 4, 6 WY2 WY4 WY6
16 points (Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
Output: CH1, 3, 5, 7 WY3 WY5 WY7
16 points (Y30 to Y3F) (Y50 to Y5F) (Y70 to Y7F)

I/O Link Unit

The I/O allocation of the I/O link unit is determined by order of connection.
Type First expansion Second Third expansion
expansion
IOL Input: 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F
output: 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F

Note
Please verify with the manual for the FP0 CC−Link slave unit.

12 − 9
Specifications FP0

12.2 I/O Allocation Table

Expression of numbers for input/output relays

Since input/output relays X and Y are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed
as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.

Example: External input relay “X”

Decimal
1, 2, 3 . . . . . 12

Hexadecimal
0, 1, 2, 3 . . . 9 A,B . . . . F

X 0, X 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X F
X 10, X 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X 1F
X 20, X 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X 2F
to to to
X 70, X 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X 7F

12 − 10
FP0 Specifications

12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants

12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants

Item Numbering Function
C10/C14/ C32/SL1 T32
C16
Relays External input X 208 points (X0 to X12F) Turns on or off based on exter-
relay nal input.
External out- Y 208 points (Y0 to Y12F) Externally outputs on or off state.
put relay
Internal relay R 1,008 points Relay which turns on or off only
(* Note 1) (R0 to R62F) within program.
Timer T 144 points If a TM instruction has timed out,
(* Note 1) (T0 to T99/C100 to C143) the contact with the same
(* Note 2) number turns on.
Counter C If a CT instruction has counted
(* Note 1) up, the contact with the same
number turns on.
Special internal R 64 points Relay which turns on or off
relay (R9000 to R903F) based on specific conditions and
is used as a flag.
Memory External input WX 13 words Code for specifying 16 external
Areas relay (WX0 to WX12) input points as one word (16 bits)
of data.
External output WY 13 words Code for specifying 16 external
relay (WY0 to WY12) output points as one word
(16 bits) of data.
Internal relay WR 63 words Code for specifying 16 internal
(* Note 1) (WR0 to WR62) relay points as one word (16 bits)
of data.
Data register DT 1,660 words 6,144 words 16,384 words Data memory used in program.
(* Note 1) (DT0 to (DT0 to (DT0 to Data is handled in 16−bit units
DT1659) DT6143) DT16383) (one word).
Timer/Counter SV 144 words Data memory for storing a
set value area (SV0 to SV143) target value of a timer and an in-
(* Note 1) itial value of a counter. Stores by
timer/counter number.
Timer/Counter EV 144 words Data memory for storing the
elapsed value area (EV0 to EV143) elapsed value during operation
(* Note 1) of a timer/counter. Stores by
timer/counter number.
Special data DT 112 words 112 words Data memory for storing
register (DT9000 to DT9111) (DT90000 specific data. Various settings
to DT90111) and error codes are stored.
Index register IX 2 words (IX, IY) Register can be used as an ad-
IY dress of memory area and con-
stants modifier.
Control Master control relay 32 points
st uct o
instruction points (MCR)
point
i
Number of labels 64 labels 255 labels
(JP and LOOP)
Number of step 128 stages 704 stages
ladders (* Note 1)
Number of 16 subroutines 100 subrou-
subroutines tines
Number of interrupt 7 programs (external 6 points, internal 1
programs point)
SL1: 1 program (internal 1 point)

12 − 11
Specifications FP0

12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants

Item Numbering Function

C10/C14/ C32/SL1 T32
C16
Constant Decimal con- K K−32768 to K32767 (for 16-bit operation)
stants
t t
K−2147483648 to K2147483647 (for 32-bit operation)
Hexadecimal H H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)
constants
t t
H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)

Notes

1) There are two unit types, the hold type that saves the
conditions that exist just before turning the power off or
changing from the RUN mode to PROG. mode, and the
non−hold type that resets them. These areas can be specified
as hold type or non−hold type by setting system register.
For the FP0 T32, the selection of hold type and non−hold type
can be changed by the setting of system register.
For the FP0 C10/C14/C16/C32/SL1, that area is fixed and
allotted the numbers as shown below.

Hold type and non−hold type areas

Item C10/C14/C16 C32/SL1
Timer Non−hold type: All points
Counter Non-hold type From the set value to C139 From the set value to C127
Hold type 4 points (elapsed values) 16 points (elapsed values)
(C140 to C143) C128 to C143
Internal Non-hold type 976 points 880 points
relay (R0 to R60F) (R0 to R54F)
61 words 55 words
(WR0 to WR60) (WR0 to WR54)
Hold type 32 points (R610 to R62F) 128 points (R550 to R62F)
2 words (WR61 to WR62) 8 words (WR55 to WR62)
Data Non-hold type 1652 words 6112 words
register
g (DT0 to DT1651) (DT0 to DT6111)
Hold type 8 words 32 words (DT6112 to
(DT1652 to DT1659) DT6143)

2) The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the
setting of system register 5. The number given in the table are
the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.

12 − 12
FP0 Specifications

12.4 FP0−SL1 S−LINK Address

12.4 FP0−SL1 S−LINK Address

I/O ad- S−LINK address I/O ad- S−LINK address I/O ad- S−LINK address I/O ad- S−LINK address
dress dress dress dress
input Deci- Hexade- input Deci- Hexade- input Deci- Hexade- input Deci- Hexade-
(X) mal cimal (X) mal cimal (X) mal cimal (X) mal cimal
X80 0 0 X90 16 10 X100 32 20 X110 48 30
X81 1 1 X91 17 11 X101 33 21 X111 49 31
X82 2 2 X92 18 12 X102 34 22 X112 50 32
X83 3 3 X93 19 13 X103 35 23 X113 51 33
X84 4 4 X94 20 14 X104 36 24 X114 52 34
X85 5 5 X95 21 15 X105 37 25 X115 53 35
X86 6 6 X96 22 16 X106 38 26 X116 54 36
X87 7 7 X97 23 17 X107 39 27 X117 55 37
X88 8 8 X98 24 18 X108 40 28 X118 56 38
X89 9 9 X99 25 19 X109 41 29 X119 57 39
X8A 10 A X9A 26 1A X10A 42 2A X11A 58 3A
X8B 11 B X9B 27 1B X10B 43 2B X11B 59 3B
X8C 12 C X9C 28 1C X10C 44 2C X11C 60 3C
X8D 13 D X9D 29 1D X10D 45 2D X11D 61 3D
X8E 14 E X9E 30 1E X10E 46 2E X11E 62 3E
X8F 15 F X9F 31 1F X10F 47 2F X11F 63 3F

I/O ad- S−LINK address I/O ad- S−LINK address I/O ad- S−LINK address I/O ad- S−LINK address
dress dress dress dress
input Deci- Hexade- input Deci- Hexade- input Deci- Hexade- input Deci- Hexade-
(Y) mal cimal (Y) mal cimal (Y) mal cimal (Y) mal cimal
Y80 64 40 Y90 80 50 Y100 96 60 Y110 112 70
Y81 65 41 Y91 81 51 Y101 97 61 Y111 113 71
Y82 66 42 Y92 82 52 Y102 98 62 Y112 114 72
Y83 67 43 Y93 83 53 Y103 99 63 Y113 115 73
Y84 68 44 Y94 84 54 Y104 100 64 Y114 116 74
Y85 69 45 Y95 85 55 Y105 101 65 Y115 117 75
Y86 70 46 Y96 86 56 Y106 102 66 Y116 118 76
Y87 71 47 Y97 87 57 Y107 103 67 Y117 119 77
Y88 72 48 Y98 88 58 Y108 104 68 Y118 120 78
Y89 73 49 Y99 89 59 Y109 105 69 Y119 121 79
Y8A 74 4A Y9A 90 5A Y10A 106 6A Y11A 122 7A
Y8B 75 4B Y9B 91 5B Y10B 107 6B Y11B 123 7B
Y8C 76 4C Y9C 92 5C Y10C 108 6C Y11C 124 7C
Y8D 77 4D Y9D 93 5D Y10D 109 6D Y11D 125 7D
Y8E 78 4E Y9E 94 5E Y10E 110 6E Y11E 126 7E
Y8F 79 4F Y9F 95 5F Y10F 111 6F Y11F 127 7F

12 − 13
Specifications FP0

12.5 Specification: Power Supply Unit I/O Link Unit

12.5 Specification: Power Supply Unit I/O Link Unit

12.5.1 FP0 Power Supply Unit (AFP0634)

Item Specification
Input
p Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V AC
Operating voltage range 85 to 264 V AC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency 47 to 63 Hz
phase Single−phase
Inrush current 30 A (0−p) or less (Cold start)
Leakage current 0.75mA
Holding time 10ms
Output
p Rated output 24V ( 5%) DC 0.7A
Rated output current 0 to 0.7A
Output ripple 500mV(p−p) or less
Regulation
g Over Current Regulation 0.74A
Over Voltage Regulation Available
Life time 20,000h (at 55 C)

12.5.2 FP0 I/O Link Unit

Item Specification
Communication method Two−line, half−duplex
Synchronous method A synchronization system
Transmission line Twisted cables
(Twisted pair cable or VCTF Min. 0.75mm2 *2C(JIS))
Transmission distance (Total length) Max. 700m (Twisted pair cable)
Max. 400m (VCTF)
Baud rate 0.5Mbps
Number of I/O points per one I/O 64 points Note) (Input 32 point + Output 32 point)
Link unit
I/O map of FP0 I/O Link Unit 32X / 32Y
Interface RS485
Communication error check method CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)

Note
This number is the number of points that I/O link is available
through the host PLC and the network MEWNET−F.
In the case I/O Link error flag is on (valid), Number of I/O points
are 63 points. (Input 31 points + Output 32 points)

12 − 14
Chapter 13

Dimensions

13.1 Control Unit and Expansion I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 3

13.1.1 FP0-C10RS/C10CRS/C14RS/C14CRS/
E8RS/E16RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 3
13.1.2 FP0-C10RM/C10CRM/C14RM/C14CRM/
E8RM/E16RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 3
13.1.3 FP0-C16T/C16CT/C16P/C16CP/E16T/E16P/
E8X/E8YT/E8YP/E32T/E32P/E16X/E16YT/
E16YP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 4
13.1.4 FP0-C32T/C32CT/C32P/C32CP/T32CT
/T32CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 4
13.1.5 FP0 S−LINK Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 5

13.2 FP0 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 5

13.3 Mounting on DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 6

13.4 FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 7

13.5 FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 8

13.6 Detailed Specifications of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 − 9

13.7 Connection (between RS232C port and PC) . . . . . 13 − 10

Dimensions FP0

13 − 2
FP0 Dimensions

13.1 Control Unit and Expansion I/O Unit

13.1 Control Unit and Expansion I/O Unit

13.1.1 FP0-C10RS/C10CRS/C14RS/C14CRS/E8RS/E16RS

Illustration: FP0-C14RS Reference measurements for wiring

(8.5/0.335)
3.5/0.138 Approx. 100.0/3.937
25.0/0.984
60.0/2.362 60.0/2.362
90.0/3.543

Approx. 130.0/5.118
90.0/3.543
(9/0.354) (7.5/0.295)
DIN rail
(DIN EN50022, 35/1.378) attachment gap

(unit: mm/in.)

13.1.2 FP0-C10RM/C10CRM/C14RM/C14CRM/E8RM/E16RM

Illustration: FP0-C14RM Reference measurements for wiring

(10/0.394)
3.5/0.138 Approx. 100.0/3.937
60.0/2.362 25.0/0.984
60.0/2.362
90.0/3.543

90.0/3.543

Approx. 130.0/5.118
(9/0.354)

(7.5/0.295)
DIN rail
(DIN EN50022, 35/1.378) attachment gap

(unit: mm/in.)

13 − 3
Dimensions FP0

13.1 Control Unit and Expansion I/O Unit

13.1.3 FP0-C16T/C16CT/C16P/C16CP/E16T/E16P/E8X/E8YT/E8YP/E32T/E32P
/E16X/E16YT/E16YP

Illustration: FP0-C16T Reference measurements for wiring

(18/0.709)
3.5/0.138 Approx. 78.0/3.071
25.0/0.984
60.0/2.362 60.0/2.362

90.0/3.543
90.0/3.543

(3.5/0.138)

(unit: mm/in.)

13.1.4 FP0-C32T/C32CT/C32P/C32CP/T32CT/T32CP

Illustration: FP0-C32T Reference measurements for wiring

(18/0.709)
3.5/0.138 Approx. 78.0/3.071
60.0/2.362 30.0/1.181 60.0/2.362
90.0/3.543

90.0/3.543

(3.5/0.138)

(unit: mm/in.)

13 − 4
FP0 Dimensions

13.2 FP0 Power Supply Unit

13.1.5 FP0 S−LINK Control Unit

30.0 60.0
(10)
1.181 (.394) 2.362

RUN SD
ERROR
ADDRESS EXPANSION
ERR
PROG
1 CONNECTOR
2
ERROR
3
ALARM 4
RUN

PROG.
SET
90.0
3.543
24V
0V
D
G
24V
IN
0V
FP0 −SL1

(9) (7.5)
(.354) (.295)
(17) DIN standard rail
(.669) (DIN EN50022 35 mm 1.378 inch width) (unit: mm/in.)
attachment gap

13.2 FP0 Power Supply Unit

35.0 19.2 60.0
1.378 .756 2.362

Input 90.0
3.543
terminal
Connection
terminal
Output
terminal

3.5
.138
(unit: mm/in.)

13 − 5
Dimensions FP0

13.3 Mounting on DIN Rail

13.3 Mounting on DIN Rail

DIN rail

67.5/2.657
60.0/2.362
A B C D
27.5/1.083

DIN rail

90.0/3.543
27.5/1.083 35.0/1.378

(unit: mm/in.)

Note
A + B +C + D dimensions (Unit: mm/in.)
Control unit type A A+B A+B+C A+B+C+D
(Control unit (1 expansion (2 expansion (3 expansion
only) unit units units
connected) connected) connected)
C10RS, C10CRS,
C10RM, C10CRM,
C14RS, C14CRS,
C14RM, C14CRM, 25/0.984 50/1.969 75/2.953 100/3.937
C16T, C16CT,
C16P, C16CP
C32T, C32CT,
30/1.181 55/2.165 80/3.150 105/4.134
C32P, C32CP

13 − 6
FP0 Dimensions

13.4 FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate

13.4 FP0 Slim Type Mounting Plate

One plate
4/0.157 25.0/0.984 10.0/0.394
6.0/0.236
90.0/3.543
60.0/2.362

dir. 10.0/0.394 dir. 5.0/0.197

2.5/0.098

(unit: mm/in.) (unit: mm/in.)

3.5/0.138

Four plates in series Mounting hole dimensions

100/3.937 75.0/2.953
25.0/ 25.0/ 25.0/
0.984 0.984 0.984
90.0/3.543
60.0/2.362

60.0/2.362

dir. 5.0/0.197

dir. 5.0/2.362

dir. 10.0/0.394 After joining all of the FP0 slim type

mounting plates to be connected, tighten
the corner screws.

Dimensions when using FP0 slim type mounting plate (unit: mm/in.)
70.0/2.756
60.0/2.362

(unit: mm/in.)

13 − 7
Dimensions FP0

13.5 FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate

13.5 FP0 Flat Type Mounting Plate

6.2/2.441 60.0/2.362

60.0/2.362
90.0/3.543

dir. 5.0/
0.197

4.0/0.157

dir. 10.0/0.394

2.2/0.087 (unit: mm/in.)

Mounting hole Dimensions when mounted on DIN rail

dimensions A
A B
Unit type
B (mm/in.) (mm/in.)
C10RS
C10CRS
C10RM
C10CRM
C14RS
60.0/2.362

C14CRS
31.2/1.23 25/0.98
C14RM
C14CRM
90.0/3.543

C16T
C16CT
C16P
C16CP
dir. 5.0/0.197 C32T
C32CT
36.2/1.43 30/1.18
C32P
C32CP

Note (unit: mm/in.)

Cannot be used if system is expanded

13 − 8
FP0 Dimensions

13.6 Detailed Specifications of Cables

13.6 Detailed Specifications of Cables

13 - 9
Dimensions FP0

13.7 Connection (between RS232C port and PC)

Layout of Programming Port Pins Common for the FP0/FP2/FP−M

4 2
Signal name Pin No.
SG 1
SD 2
RD 3
1
− 4
5 +5V 5
3

The controller’s tool port is provided with the TCS7557−0121077 connector for FP0
made by Hoshiden Corporation.

13.7 Connection (between RS232C port and PC)

Connection example
FP0 RS232C port PC (D−SUB 9−pin female)
(DOS/V version)
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
S SD 1 CD
R RD 2 RD
G SG 3 SD
4 ER
5 SG
6 DR
7 RS
8 CS

13 − 10
Chapter 14
Appendix
14. Appendix ...................................................................................... 14-1

14.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers... 14-3
14.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0 ........................................................14-5
14.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0 .............................................14-15
14.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0..............................................14-18

14.2 Table of Basic Instructions .................................................................. 14-28

14.3 Table of High-level Instructions ........................................................... 14-62

14.4 Table of Error codes.......................................................................... 14-122

14.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands .............................. 14-136

14.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD.................................................................. 14-137

14.7 ASCII Codes...................................................................................... 14-138

14-2
14.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special
Data Registers
Precation for System Registers

What is the system register area

• System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions
used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program.
• There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used.

Type of system registers

The registers to be used depend on each PLC.

(1) Allocation of user memory (System registers 0, 1 and 2)

These registers set the size of the program area and file register area, allowing the user memory area to
be configured for the environment used. The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type.
(2) Allocation of timers and counters (System register 5)
The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number.
(3) Hold/non-hold type setting (System registers 6 to 18)
When these registers are set to “hold type”, the values in the relays and data memory will be retained
even if the system is switched to PROG. mode or the power is turned off. If set to “non-hold type”, the
values will be cleared to “0”.
(4) Operation mode setting on error (System registers 4, 20 to 28)
Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error
and operation error occur.
(5) Time settings (System registers 30 to 34)
Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time.
(6) Remote I/O operation settings (System registers 35 and 36)
These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote
I/O is started, and the remote I/O update timing.
(7) MEWNET-W0/MEWNET-W/P PLC link settings (System registers 40 to 47, 50 to 55, and 57)
These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET-W0/MEWNET-W/P PC(PLC) link
communication.
Note) The default value setting is “no PC(PLC) link communication”.
(8) MEWNET-H PC(PLC) link settings (System register 49)
Set the data size to be processed during one scan in the MEWNET-H PC(PLC) link communication.
(9) Input settings (System registers 400 to 406)
When using the high-speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation
mode and the input number to be used for the function.
(10) Input time constant settings (FP1/FP-M System registers 404 to 407)
Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering
or noises.
(11) Number of temperature input averaging process settings (System register 409)
The number of averaging times can be set in order to even out the variation in the input thermocouple
values. For normal use it, set the number of times to t least twenty. For default value “0”, the number of
average processing times is 20.
(12) Tool and COM. ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 421)
Set these registers when the Tool port,and COM1 and COM2 ports are to be used for computer link,
general-purpose serial communication, PC(PLC) link, and modem communication.Note that
the default setting is computer link mode.

14-3
Checking and changing the set value of system register
If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read),
there is no need write it again.

Using programming tool software

Produce:
1. Set the control unit in the PROG mode.
2.Option ->PLC Configuration
3.When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration
dialog box,the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed.
To change the value and setting status,write in the new value and /or select the setting status.
4.To register these settings,choose OK

Precautions for system register setting

-System register settings are effective from the time they are set.
However, input settings,tool port,COM port,and modem connection settings become effective when the
mode is changed from PROG. to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power
is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a
command to the modem which enables it for reception.
-When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized.

14-4
14.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0
Content of system register settings
1. Setting the timers and counters (System register 5)
By indicating the counter start number, the timer and counter are split into two areas. The timer and
counter together total 144 points, and the default value for th split is 100. Thus the point allotment is as
shown in the table below.

Timer 100 points (No. 0 to No. 99)

Counter 44 points (No. 100 to No. 143)

Setting example
To increase the number of timers to 120, change the value of system register 5 to K120.

For FP0 T32, set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value. This sets the timer to a non-hold type
and counter to a hold type.

By setting system register 5 to “0”, the whole area becomes the counter. Also, by setting it to the value
“144”, the whole area becomes the timer.

14-5
2. Hold types and non-hold type settings (System registers 6 to 8 and 14)
With the FP0 C10/C14/C16/C32/SL1, the areas held in the event of a power supply interruption are fixed
at the areas shown in the table below, and the settings for system registers 6 to 8 and 14, will be invalid.

C10/C14/C16
Timer Non-hold type: All points
Non-hold type: From the set value to C139
Counter
Hold type: 4 points (elapsed values )C140 to C143
976 points (R0 to R60F)
Non-hold type:
61 words (WR0 to WR60)
Internal relay
32 points (R610 to R62F)
Hold type:
2 words (WR61 to WR62)
Non-hold type: 1652 words (DT0 to DT1651)
Data register
Hold type: 8 words (DT1652 to DT1659)

C32/SL1
Timer Non-hold type: All points
Non-hold type: From the set value to C127
Counter
Hold type: 16 points (elapsed values )C128 to C143
880 points (R0 to R54F)
Non-hold type:
55 words (WR0 to WR54
Internal relay
128 points (R550 to R62F)
Hold type:
8 words (WR55 to WR62)
Non-hold type: 6112 words (DT0 to DT6111)
Data register
Hold type: 32 words (DT6112 to DT6143)

With the FP0 T32, set each relay and register to a hold type or non-hold type.

For normal situations, set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value. This sets the timer to a non-
hold type and counter to a hold type.
By setting this value to “0”, the whole area becomes hold type. Also, by setting it to the valeu 1 higher
than the last number, the whold area becomes non-hold type.

C32/SL1
Type
FP0 T32
Area
Timer All non-hold type
Counter All hold type
Internal Non-hold type Non-hold type: 10 words (WR0 to WR9)
relay Hold type Hold type: 53 words (WR10 to WR62)
Data register All hold type

14-6
Table of system registers
C10, C14, C16, C32, T32 and SL1 in the table respectively indicate 10-point, 14-point, 16-point, 32-point
type and S-LINK type FP0 control units.
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
The set values are fixed and cannot
be changed.
Alloca-
The stored values vary depending on
tion of Sequence program area
0 - the type.
user capacity
K3: 3K words (FP0 C10, C14, C16)
memory
K5: 5K words (FP0 C32, SL1)
K10: 10K words (FP0 T32)
Timer and counter
100 0 to 144
5 division (setting of
(K100) (K0 to K144)
starting counter number) Set the system
Hold type area starting registers 5 and 6 to
number setting for timer 100 0 to 144 the same value.
6
and counter (K100) (K0 to K144)
(Available type: T32)
Hold type area starting
Hold/
number setting for internal 10
Non- 7 0 to 63 (K0 to K63)
relays (in word units) (K10)
hold
(Available type: T32)
Hold type area starting
number setting for data 0
8 0 to 16384 (K0 to K16384)
registers (K0)
(Available type: T32)
Hold or non-hold setting
Non-hold Hold (K10)
14 for step ladder process
(K1) Non-hold (K1)
(Available type: T32)
Disable or enable setting Disable Disable (will be syntax error) (K0)
20
for duplicated output (K0) Enable (will not be syntax error) (K1)
Operation setting when an
Stop Stop (K0)
23 I/O verification error
(K0) Operate (K1)
occurs
Action
Operation setting when an Stop Stop (K0)
on error 26
operation error occurs (K0) Operate (K1)
Operation settings when
communication error Operate Stop (K0)
27
occurs in the remote I/O (K1) Operate (K1)
(S-LINK) system
Note) The setting values of the system registers No. 6, 7, 8 and 14 becomes invalid with the types other
than T32.

14-7
 FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
10 ms to 81900 ms (K4 to K32760)
Used of default setting (K2600/6500
ms) is recommended.

Wait time setting for

6500 ms
31 multi-frame
(K2600)
communication

Time
setting 2.5 ms to 160 ms (K1 to K64 ): Scans
once each specified time interval.
0 (K0):Normal scan

Constant value settings 0 ms

34
for scan time (K0)

Do not set X0 as high-speed

counter.
2-phase input (X0, X1)
2-phase input (X0, X1),
Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
Do not set Incremental input (X0), Reset input
X0 as (X2)
high- CH0 Decremental input (X0)
speed Decremental input (X0),
High-speed Reset input (X2)
Setting by counter.
counter Individual input (X0, X1)
Input progra-
400 mode Individual input (X0, X1),
setting mming tool Reset input (X2)
settings
software Direction decision (X0, X1)
(X0 to X2)
Direction decision (X0, X1),
Reset input (X2)
Do not set X1 as high-speed
Do not set counter.
X1 as Incremental input (X1)
Incremental input (X1), Reset input
high- CH1
(X2)
speed Decremental input (X1)
counter. Decremental input (X1), Reset input
(X2)
Note1) If the operation mode is set to 2-phase, individual, or direction differentiation, the setting for CH1
is invalid.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH1 takes precedence.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].
14-8
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value

High-
Setting
speed
by FP
Input counter CH0/
400 pro- H0
setting mode CH1
grammer
settings
II
(X0 to X2)

Note1) If the operation mode is set to 2-phase, individual, or direction differentiation, the setting for CH1
is invalid.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH1 takes precedence.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].

14-9
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
Do not set X3 as high-speed counter.
2-phase input (X3, X4)
2-phase input (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
Incremental input (X3)
Do not Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
set X3 Decremental input (X3)
as high- CH2 Decremental input (X3),
speed Reset input (X5)
Individual input (X3, X4)
counter.
Individual input (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
Direction decision (X3, X4)
Direction decision (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
Do not Do not set X4 as high-speed counter.
set X4 Incremental input (X4)
as high- CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
speed Decremental input (X4)
counter. Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)

Setting
High-
by
speed
progra-
Input counter
401 mming
setting mode
tool
settings
soft-
(X3 to X5)
ware

CH2/
H0
CH3

Note1) If the operation mode is set to 2-phase, individual, or direction differentiation, the setting for CH3
is invalid.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH3 takes precedence.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].

14-10
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value

The checked contacts are set as

pulse catch input.

In FP Programmer II, enter the above

settings in hexadecimal.
Example:
Pulse catch input Not set When X3 and X4 are set as pulse
402
function settings (H0) catch input

With the FP0, settings X6 and X7 are

invalid.
Using FPWIN GR

Input
setting The checked contacts are set as
interrupt input.

Specify the effective interrupt edge.

(When set: ON→OFF is valid)
Using FP Programmer II
Not set Example:
403 Interrupt input settings When setting inputs X0, X1, X2 and
(H0)
X3 as interrupts, and X0 and X1 are
set as interrupt inputs when going
from on to off.

Note1) With the TOOL software, “0” or “1” is set for each bit on the screen in the setting for system
register 403.
Note2) If system register 400 to 403 are set simultaneously for the same inptu relay, the following
precedence order is effective:
[High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].
When the high-speed counter is being used in the incremental input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input and as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and input X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.
No. 400: H1 a This setting will be valid. No. 402: H1 No. 403: H1

14-11
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
Unit No. setting for tool
1
410 port (when connecting C- 1 to 32 (K1 to K32)
(K1)
NET)
Using FPWIN GR
Modem: Disable/Enable
Data length: 7 bits/8 bits

Using FP programmer II
Specify the setting contents using H
constants.
Modem:
Disabled
Tool Communication format Data
411
port setting for tool port length:
setting 8 bits
(H0)

When connecting a modem, set the

unit number to 1 with system register
410.
Setting by
Baud rate program 9600 0: 9600 bps
414
setting ming tool (H0) 1: 19200 bps
software

Tool
Baud rate Setting by
port/
setting for FP pro-
RS232C 414 H1
tool port and grammer
port
RS232C port II
setting

If 19200 bps is set for both the tool

port and RS232C port, H100 should
be written.

14-12
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
Using FPWIN GR
Not used
Computer link
General-purpose communication
Not used Using FP programmer II
412 Selection of operation
(K0) K0: RS232C port is not used.
K1: Computer link mode (when
connecting C-NET)
K2: Serial data communication mode
(general port)
Using FPWIN GR
- Data length: 7 bits/8bits
- Parity check: None/Odd/Even
- Stop bit: 1/2
* The following setting is valid only
when the communication mode
specified by system register 412 has
been set to “General-purpose serial
communication”.
Start code:
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
None - Start code: STX not exist/STX exist
Terminal
code: CR Using FP programmer II
Stop bit: Specify the setting contents using H
413 Communication format 1 bit constants.
RS232C Paritycheck:
port With odd
setting
Data length:
8 bits
(H3)

19200 bps
9600 bps
Baud Setting by 4800 bps
9600
414 rate programming 2400 bps
setting tool software (H1) 1200 bps
600 bps
300 bps
Unit no. (when 1
415 1 to 32 (K1 to K32)
connecting C-NET) (K1)
Using FPWIN GR
Diable/Enable
Disable
416 Modem connection Using FP programmer II
(H0)
H0: Modem disabled
H8000: Modem enabled

14-13
 Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
C10C/C14C/C16C: 0 to 1659 (K0 to
Starting address setting 0 K1659)
417
for received buffer (K0) C32C/SL1: 0 to 6143 (K0 to K6143)
T32C: 0 to 16383 (K0 to K16383)
C10C/C14 1660
0 to 1660 (K0 to K1660)
Capacity C/C16C (K1660)
setting for 6144
418 C32C/SL1 0 to 6144 (K0 to K6144)
reception (K6144)
buffer 16384
T32C 0 to 16384 (K0 to K16384)
(K16384)

14-14
14.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.
Address Name Description
Self-diagnostic error Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
flag The self-diagnostic error code is stored in DT9000.
R9001 to
Not used -
R9003
Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
I/O verification error
R9004 The position number of the I/O where the verification error
flag
was occurred is stored in DT9010.
R9005,
Not used -
R9006
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error
Operation error flag occurs.
R9007
(hold) The address where the error occurred is stored in DT9017.
(Indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error flag
R9008 The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
(non-hold)
DT9018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
Turns on for an instant,
R9009 Carry flag - when an overflow or underflow occurs.
– when “1” is set by one of the shift instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900A > Flag larger in the “F60 (CMP) to F63 (DWIN) comparison
instructions.”
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions (F60 to F63).
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900C < Flag smaller in the “F60 (CMP) to F63 (DWIN) comparison
instructions.
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in
the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM)
Auxiliary timer
R900D auxiliary timer instruction.
contact
It turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction
turns off.
This turns on when an error occurs during communication
R900E Tool port error flag
with a programming tool.
Constant scan error Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in
R900F
flag system register 34 during constant scan execution.
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.

14-15
FP0
Address Name Description
Turns on only at the first scan in the operation.
R9013 Initial on pulse relay
Turns off from the second scan and maintains the off state.
Turns off only at the first scan in the operation.
R9014 Initial off pulse relay
Turns on from the second scan andmaintains the on state.
Step ladder initial on Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process
R9015
pulse relay the moment step ladder process is opened.
R9016,
Not used -
R9017
0.01 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.01 s
R9018
relay cycles.

0.02 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s

R9019
relay cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.1 s

R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.2 s

R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 1 s

R901C 1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 2 s

R901D 2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

1 min clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1 min

R901E
relay cycles.
R901F Not used -
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 to
Not used -
R9025
R9026
Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
(*Note)
R9027
Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to REMOTE.
(*Note)
R9028 Not used -
Note) Used by the system.

14-16
FP0
Address Name Description
R9029 Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay
Forcing flag
(*Note) timer/counter contacts.
R902A External interrupt Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by
(*Note) enable flag the ICTL instruction.
R902B
Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
(*Note)
R902C to
Not used -
R902F
R9030,
Not used -
R9031
RS232C port mode
R9032 When “General-use port” is selected, “K2” goes on.
flag
Printout instruction Turns on while a F147 (PR) instruction is executed.
R9033
flag Turns off when a F147 (PR) instruction is not executed.
This is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first
Rewrite during RUN
R9034 scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode.
flag
(CPU Ver. 2.1 or later available)
S-LINK I/O communi- Turns on when the S-LINK error (ERR 1, 3 or 4) occurs
R9035
cation error flag using S-LINK system.
S-LINK communica- Turns on when communication is taking place with an S-
R9036
tion status flag LINK input/Ooutput unit.
RS232C communica-
R9037 Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs.
tion error flag
RS232C reception Turns on when a terminator is received during the serial
R9038
completed flag data communicating.
Turns on while data is not send during the serial data
RS232C transmission communicating.
R9039
completed flag Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data
communicating.
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903A counter control ch0
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903B counter control ch1
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903C counter control ch2
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903D counter control ch3
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
R903E,
Not used -
R903F
Note) Used by the system.

14-17
14.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0
The special data registers are one word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific information. With the
exception of registers for which “Writing is possible” is indicated in the “Description” column, these
registers cannot be written to.

Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
Self-diagnostic error
DT90000 DT9000 when a self-diagnostic error occurs. Monitor the
code
error code using decimal display.
The position of the I/O for which an error
DT90010 DT9010 I/O verify error unit
occurred is stored in bits 0 to 3.
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Auxiliary register for
DT90014 DT9014 positions 0 to 3 when F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL)
operation
instruction is executed.
The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in
DT90015 DT9015 DT9015/DT90015 when F32(%) or F52(B%)
instruction is executed.
Auxiliary register for
The divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
operation
DT9015 and DT9016/DT90015 and DT90016
DT90016 DT9016 when F33(D%) or F53(DB%) instruction is
executed.
After commencing operation, the address where
Operation error
DT90017 DT9017 the first operation error occurred is stored.
address (hold)
Monitor the address using decimal display.
The address where an operation error occurred
is stored. Each time an error occurs, the new
Operation error
DT90018 DT9018 address overwrites the previous address. At the
address (non-hold )
beginning of scan, the address is 0. Monitor the
address using decimal display.
The data stored here is increased by one every
2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
DT90019 DT9019 2.5 ms ring counter Difference between the values of the two points
(absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed time
between the two points.

14-18
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1

DT9020
(Availabl S-LINK status
-
e type: flag/error flag
SL1)
Notes
- ERR1 and ERR3 occur even if the power
supply on the S-LINK side is interrupted, but are
canceled when the power supply is turned on
again.
- ERR4 is held. To cancel it, repair the
disconnected wire in the S-LINK syste, or
whatever iscausing the problem, and then either
turn the power to the FP0 on again, press the
SET switch to reset it, or turn the power supply
on again on the S-LINK unit side.

14-19
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
(When normal)

Note
- When the SET switch is pressed, the number
of input/output units connected to the S-LINK
system is set.
DT9021 (If the same address has been specified for
No. of units connected multiple units, the units are counted as a single
(Availabl
- to S-LINK/error
e type: unit. This is invalid, however, if an ERR4 error is
address
SL1) in progress.)

(If ERR4 occurs)

The current scan time is stored here. Scan time

Scan time (current
is calculated using the formula:
DT90022 DT9022 value)
Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1
(*Note)
K50 indicates 5 ms.
Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. The maximum and
minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG. mode.

14-20
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
Scan time (minimum time is calculated using the formula:
DT90023 DT9023
value) (*Note1) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
Scan time (maximum scan time is calculated using the formula:
DT90024 DT9024
value) (*Note 1) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using ICTL
instruction can be monitored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
DT90025 DT9025 monitoring register for
(*Note2) (*Note2) interrupts
(INT 0 to 5)

DT90026 DT9026 Not used -

The value set by the ICTL instruction is stored.
DT90027 DT9027 Periodical interrupt
K0: periodical interrupt is not used.
(*Note2) (*Note2) interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 10ms to 30s
DT90028 DT9028 Not used -
DT90029 DT9029 Not used -
DT90030 DT9030
Message 0
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90031 DT9031
Message 1
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90032 DT9032
Message 2 The contents of the specified message are
(*Note2) (*Note2)
stored in these special data registers when F149
DT90033 DT9033
Message 3 (MSG) instruction is executed.
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90034 DT9034
Message 4
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90035 DT9035
Message 5
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90036 DT9036 Not used -
The number of data that match the searched
Work 1 for F96 (SRC)
DT90037 DT9037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) instruction
instruction
is executed.
Note1) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time. The
maximum and minimum values are cleared when each mode is switched between RUN mode and
PROG. mode.
Note2) Used by the system.

14-21
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The position of the first matching data, counting
Work 2 for F96 (SRC)
DT90038 DT9038 from the starting 16-bit area, is stored here when
instruction
an F96 (SRC) instruction is executed.
DT90039 DT9039
to to Not used -
DT90043 DT9043
The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
DT90044 DT9044
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value for ch0 to the special registers DT9044 and
DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045.
DT90045 DT9045
The value can be written by executing F1 (DMV)
instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90046 DT9046
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter Target values have been preset for the various
target value for ch0 instructions, to be used when the high-speed
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90047 DT9047
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.
The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
DT90048 DT9048
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value area for
to the special registers DT9048 and
ch1
DT9049/DT90048 and DT90049.
DT90049 DT9049
The value can be written by executing F1 (DMV)
instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90050 DT9050
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value area for
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
ch1
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90051 DT9051
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.

14-22
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, stop high-speed counter instruction
(F168), and clear the high-speed counter.

Control code setting

Software is not reset: H0 (0000)

Perform software reset: H1 (0001)
High-speed counter Disable count: H2 (0010)
DT90052 DT9052 Disable hardware reset: H4 (0100)
control flag
Stop pulse output (clear instruction): H8 (1000)
Perform software reset and stop pulse output:
H9 (1001)

The 16 bits of DT9052/DT90052 are allocated in

groups of four to high-speed channels 0 to 3 as
shown below.

A hardware reset disable is only effective when

using the reset input (X2 and X5). In all other
cases it is ignored.
When using pulse output, a hardware reset input
is equivalent to an home point proximate input.
Hour and minute data of the clock/calendar are
stored here.
This data is read-only data; it cannot be
overwritten.
Clock/calendar monitor
DT90053 -
(hour/minute)

14-23
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and
Clock/calendar monitor
day-of-the-week data for the calendar timer is
DT90054 - and setting
stored. The built-in calendar timer will operate
(minute/second)
correctly through the year 2099 and supports
leap years. The calendar timer can be set (the
time set) by writing a value using a programming
Clock/calendar monitor
DT90055 - and setting tool software or a program that uses the F0 (MV)
(day/hour) instruction.

Clock/calendar monitor
DT90056 - and setting
(year/month)

Clock/calendar monitor
DT90057 - and setting
(day-of-the-week)

14-24
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The clock/calendar is adjusted as follows.
When setting the clock/calendar by program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the time
is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot be
performed with any instruction other than F0
(MV) instruction.)

Example:
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the
X0 turns on.

If you changed the values of DT90054 to

DT90057 with the data monitor functions of
Clock/calendar time programming tool software, the time will be set
DT90058 - setting and 30 seconds when the new values are written. Therefore, it is
correction unnecessary to write to DT90058.

When the correcting times less than 30

seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become
exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is
completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0.

Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns on

At the time of correction, if between 0 and 29

seconds, it will be moved down, and if the
between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved up.
In the example above, if the time was 5 minutes
29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes 0 second;
and, if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds, it will
become 6 minutes 0 second.
Note) After discharging the battery (including when the power is turned on for the first time), the values of
DT90053 to DT90058 change at random. Once the time and date have been set, these values will
function normally.

14-25
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1

Serial communication
DT90059 DT9059 - Tool port
error code
bit 0=1: Over run error
bit 1=1: Framing error
bit 2=1: Parity error
- RS232C port
bit 8=1: Over run error
bit 9=1: Framing error
bit 10=1: Parity error
Process
DT90060 DT9060 number:
0 to 15
Process
DT90061 DT9061 number: Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder
16 to 31 process. When the process starts up, the bit
Process corresponding to the process number turns
DT90062 DT9062 number: on”1”.
32 to 47
Process Monitor using binary display.
DT90063 DT9063 number:
Step
48 to 63
ladder
Process
process
DT90064 DT9064 number:
64 to 79
Process
DT90065 DT9065 number:
80 to 95
Process A programming tool software can be used to
DT90066 DT9066 number: write data.
96 to 111
Process
DT90067 DT9067 number:
112 to 127

14-26
 Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
DT90104 DT9104 speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value area for
to the special registers DT9104 and
ch2
DT9015/DT90104 and DT90105.
DT90105 DT9105 The value can be written by executing a DMV
(F1) instruciton.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90106 DT9106
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value area for
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
ch2
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90107 DT9107
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.
The elapsed value (24-bit data) of the high-
speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
DT90108 DT9108
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value area for
to the special registers DT9108 and
ch3
DT9109/DT90108 and DT90109.
DT90109 DT9109
The value can be written by executing a DMV
(F1) instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90110 DT9110
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value area for
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
ch3
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90111 DT9111
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.

14-27
14.2 Table of Basic Instructions

Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)

Sequence basic instructions

Start ST Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) 1 (2)
contact.
Start Not ST/ Begins a logic operation with a Form B (normally closed) 1 (2)
contact.
Out OT Outputs the operated result to the specified output. 1 (2)

Not / Inverts the operated result up to this instruction. 1

AND AN Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially. 1 (2)

AND Not AN/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact serially. 1 (2)

OR OR Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel. 1 (2)

OR Not OR/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact in parallel. 1 (2)

Leading ST↑ Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the 2
edge start leading edge of the trigger is detected.

Trailing edge ST↓ Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing 2
start edge of the trigger is detected.

Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included),
L1280, T256, C256 or anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions,
the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay
number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.

14-28
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Sequence basic instructions

Start A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Start Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Out A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A

AND A A A A A A A A A A A A A

AND Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A

OR A A A A A A A A A A A A A

OR Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Leading N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge start N/A
Note2)

Trailing edge N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
start N/A
Note2)

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later and FPsigma Ver.3.10 or later.

14-29
 Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)

Leading AN↑ Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially only 2

edge AND for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is
detected.
Trailing edge AN↓ Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially only 2
AND for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is
detected.
Leading OR↑ Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel only 2
edge OR for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is
detected.
Trailing edge OR↓ Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel only 2
OR for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is
detected.
Leading OT↑ Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for 2
edge out one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected. (for
pulse relay)
Trailing edge OT↓ Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for 2
out one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected. (for
pulse relay)
Alternative ALT Inverts the output condition (on/off) each time the leading 3
out edge of the trigger is detected.

AND stack ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially. 1

OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in parallel. 1

Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this instruction. 1

Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction. 1

Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS 1
instruction
Leading DF Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading 1
edge edge of the trigger is detected.
differential
Trailing edge DF/ Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing 1
differential edge of the trigger is detected.

Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included),
L1280, T256, C256 or anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions,
the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay
number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.

14-30
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Leading N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge AND N/A
Note2)

Trailing edge N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
AND N/A
Note2)

Leading N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge OR N/A
Note2)

Trailing edge N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
OR N/A
Note2)

Leading N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge out

Trailing edge N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
out

Alternative N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
out

AND stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A

OR stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Push stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Note3)

Read stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Pop stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Note3)

Leading A A A A A A A A A A A A A
edge
differential
Trailing edge A A A A A A A A A A A A A
differential

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later.
Note3) The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models.

14-31
 Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)

Leading DFI Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading 1
edge differ- edge of the trigger is detected. The leading edge detection
ential (initial is possible on the first scan.
execution
type)
Set SET Output is set to and held at on. 3

Reset RST Output is set to and held at off. 3

Keep KP Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on. 1 (2)

No operation NOP No operation. 1

Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280 or
anything beyond for the KP instruction, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the
FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown
in parentheses.

14-32
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Leading N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

edge differ-
ential (initial
execution
type)
Set A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Reset A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Keep A A A A A A A A A A A A A

No operation A A A A A A A A A A A A A

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-33
 Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)

Basic function instructions

On-delay TML After set value “n” x 0.001 seconds, timer contact “a” is set 3 (4)
timer to on.

TMR After set value “n” x 0.01 seconds, timer contact “a” is set 3 (4)
to on.

TMX After set value “n” x 0.1 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to 3 (4)
on.

TMY After set value “n” x 1 second, timer contact “a” is set to on. 4 (5)

Auxiliary F137 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the specified output and 5
timer (16-bit) (STMR) R900D are set to on.
Auxiliary F183 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the specified output and 7
timer (32-bit) (DSTM) R900D are set to on.
Time F182 Executes the filter processing for the specified input. 9
constant
processing
Counter CT Decrements from the preset value “n” 3 (4)

UP/DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the preset value “S” based 5
counter (UDC) on up/donw input.

Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a timer
number or counter number has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in
parentheses.

14-34
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Basic function instructions

On-delay A A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A Partly Partly
timer TML N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1)

On-delay A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly

timer TMR N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1)

On-delay A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly

timer TMX N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1)

On-delay A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly

timer TMY N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1)

Auxiliary A A A A N/A N/A A N/A A A A A A

timer (16-bit)
Auxiliary A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A A A A
timer (32-bit)
Time N/A N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
constant N/A
Note2)
processing
Counter A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly
N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1)

UP/DOWN A A A A A A A A A A A A A
counter

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) With FP2SH, FP10SH, FP-X Ver2.0 or later, an arbitrary device can be specified for the setting
value of the counter instruction.
Note2) This instruction is available only for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later.

14-35
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Shift register SR Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal relay (WR)] data to 1 (2)
Note1)
the left.

Left/right F119 Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range specified by “D1” and 5
shift register (LRSR) “D2” to the left or to the right.

Control instructions
Master MC Starts the master control program. 2
control relay

Master MCE Ends the master control program. 2

control relay
end

Jump JP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 2 (3)
Note2)
from there.
Label LBL 1

Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label instruction specified by “S” 3
jump (SJP) and continues from there.

Label LBL 1

*1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number
(word address) has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump instruction has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses.

14-36
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Shift register A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Left/right A A A A A A A A A A A A A
shift register

Control instructions
Master A A A A A A A A A A A A A
control relay

Master A A A A A A A A A A A A A
control relay
end

Jump A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Label

Auxiliary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
jump

Label

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-37
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 4 (5)
Note1)
from there (the number of jumps is set in “S”).
Label LBL 1

Break BRK Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger 1

turns on in the TEST/RUN mode only.
End ED The operation of program is ended. Indicates the end of a 1
main program.
Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when the trigger turns 1
end on.
Eject EJECT Adds page break fo ruse when printing. 1

Step ladder instructions

Start step SSTP The start of program “n” for process control 3

Next step NSTL Start the specified process “n” and clear the process 3
currently started. (Scan execution type)
NSTP Start the specified process “n” and clear the process 3
currently started. (Pulse execution type)
Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process “n”. 3

Clear multi- SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by “n1” and “n2”. 5
ple steps
Step end STPE End of step ladder area 1

Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a loop instruction has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses.

14-38
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Loop A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Label

Break N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A

End A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Conditional A A A A A A A A A A A A A
end
Eject N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

Step ladder instructions

Start step A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Next step A A A A A A A A A A A A A
NSTL
Next step A A A A A A A A A A A A A
NSTP
Clear step A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Clear multi- N/A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

ple steps
Step end A A A A A A A A A A A A A

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-39
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Subroutine instructions
Subroutine CALL Executes the specified subroutine. When returning to the 2 (3)
Note1)
call main program, outputs in the subroutine program are
maintained.
Output off FCAL Executes the specified subroutine. When returning to the 4 (5)
Note1)
type subrou- main program, all outputs in the subroutine program are
tine call set to off.
Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine program “n”. 1
entry

Subroutine RET Ends the subroutine program. 1

return

Interrupt instructions
Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program “n”. 1

Interrupt IRET Ends the interrupt program. 1

return

Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt enable/disable or clear in “S1” and “S2” 5

control and execute.

Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index modifier,
the number of steps is the number in paretheses.

14-40
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Subroutine instructions
Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A
call

Output off N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
type subrou-
tine call
Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A
entry

Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A
return

Interrupt instructions
Interrupt A A A A N/A A A A A A A A A

Interrupt A A A A N/A A A A A A A A A
return

Interrupt A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

control

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-41
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Special setting instructions

Communica- SYS1 Change the communication conditions for the COM port or 13
tion condi- tool port based on the contents specified by the character
tions setting constant.

Password Change the password specified by the PLC based on the

setting contents specified by the character constant.

Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by

setting the character constant.

PLC link Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used, based
time setting on the contents specified by the character constant.

MEWTOCOL Change the communication conditions of the COM. port or

-COM tool port for MEWTOCOL-COM based on the contents
response specified by the character constant.
control
High-speed Change the operation mode of the high-speed counter,
counter based on the contents specified by the character constant.
operation
mode
changing
System SYS2 Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC 7
registers link function.
“No. 40 to
No. 47”
changing

14-42
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Special setting instructions

Communica- N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1)
tion condi-
tions setting

Password N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note2)
setting

Interrupt N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
setting

PLC link N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
time setting

MEWTOCOL N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
-COM
response
control
High-speed N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
counter
operation
mode
changing
System N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
registers
“No. 40 to
No. 47”
changing

Note1) With FP-X Ver2.0 or later, the baud rate can be selected from 300, 600 or 1200 bps.
Note2) With FPsigma 32k type, the 8-digit password can be selected.

14-43
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Data compare instructions

16-bit data ST= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in 5
compare the comparative condition “S1=S2”.
(Start)

ST<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in 5

the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.

ST> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in 5

the comparative condition “S1>S2”.

ST>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in 5

the comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.

ST< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in 5

the comparative condition “S1<S2”.

ST<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in 5

the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.

14-44
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Data compare instructions

16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
ST=
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
ST<>
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
ST>
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
ST>=
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
ST<
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
ST<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-45
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

16-bit data AN= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 5

compare comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
(AND) “S1=S2”.

AN<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.

AN> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1>S2”.

AN>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.

AN< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1<S2”.

AN<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.

14-46
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

compare
(AND)
AN=
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AN<>
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AN>
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AN>=
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AN<
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AN<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-47
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

16-bit data OR= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 5

compare comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
(OR) “S1=S2”.

OR<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.

OR> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1>S2”.

OR>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.

OR< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1<S2”.

OR<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 5

comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition
“S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.

14-48
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

compare
(OR)
OR=
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
OR<>
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
OR>
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
OR>=
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
OR<
16-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
OR<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-49
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

32-bit data STD= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9
compare the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
(Start)

STD<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

STD> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

STD>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or
“(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

STD< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

STD<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or
“(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

14-50
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

compare
(Start)
STD=
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
STD<>
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
STD>
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
STD>=
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
STD<
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(Start)
STD<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-51
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

32-bit data AND= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

compare comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
(AND) “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

AND<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

AND> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

AND>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

AND< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

AND<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

14-52
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

compare
(AND)
AND=
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AND<>
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AND>
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AND>=
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AND<
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(AND)
AND<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-53
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

32-bit data ORD= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

compare comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
(OR) “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

ORD<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

ORD> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

ORD>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

ORD< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

ORD<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

14-54
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

compare
(OR)
ORD=
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
ORD<>
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
ORD>
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
ORD>=
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
ORD<
32-bit data A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
compare
(OR)
ORD<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

14-55
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Floating STF= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

point type the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
real number
data
compare
(Start)
STF<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9
the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

STF> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

STF>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or
“(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

STF< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

STF<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9

the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or
“(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

14-56
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF=
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF<>
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF>
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF>=
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF<
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later, FPΣ 32k and FP2/FP2SH V2.0 or later.

14-57
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Floating ANF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

point type comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
real number “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
data
compare
(AND)
ANF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9
comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

ANF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

ANF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

ANF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

ANF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

14-58
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF<>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF>=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF<
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later, FPΣ 32k and FP2/FP2SH V2.0 or later.

14-59
 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps

Floating ORF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

point type comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
real number “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
data
compare
(OR)
ORF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9
comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

ORF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

ORF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

ORF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

ORF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by 9

comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition
“(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

14-60
 Availability
FP1 FP-M

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF<>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF>=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF<
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF<=

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later, FPΣ 32k and FP2/FP2SH V2.0 or later.

14-61
14.3 Table of High-level Instructions
The high-level instructions are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with numbers. For most of the high-
level instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The differences between the two types are explained
as follows:
• Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on.
• Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected.

Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Data transfer instructions

F0 16-bit data MV S, D (S)→(D) 5
P0 move PMV
F1 32-bit data DMV S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P1 move PDMV
F2 16-bit data MV S, D (S)→(D) 5
P2 invert and PMV/
move
F3 32-bit data DMV/ S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P3 invert and PDMV/
move
F4 Reading of GETS S, D The head word No. of the specified slot is read. 5
P4 head word PGETS
No. of the
specified
slot
F5 Bit data BTM S, n, D The specified one bit in “S” is transferred to the 7
P5 move PBTM specified one bit in “D”. The bit is specified by “n”.
F6 Hexadecimal DGT S, n, d The specified one digit in “S” is transferred to the 7
P6 digit (4-bit) PDGT specified one digit in “D”. The digit is specified by
data move “n”.
F7 Two 16-bit MV2 S1, S2, D (S1)→(D), 7
P7 data move PMV2 (S2)→(D+1)
F8 Two 32-bit DMV2 S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D), 11
P8 data move PDMV2 (S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2)
F10 Block move BKMV S1, S2, D The data between “S1” and “S2” is transferred to 7
P10 PBKMV the area starting at “D”.

14-62
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Data transfer instructions

F0 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P0
F1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P1
F2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P2

F3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P3

F4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P4 N/A N/A
Note2) Note2)

F5 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P5
F6 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P6

F7 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P7
F8 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P8
F10 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P10

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.

14-63
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, D2 The data of “S” is transferred to the all area 7
P11 PCOPY between “D1” and “D2”.
F12 Data read ICRD S1, S2, D The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC 11
P12 from IC PICRD card or ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” are
F12 card/ROM ICRD transferred to the area startign at “D”.

F13 Data write to ICWT S1, S2, D The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred 11
P13 IC card/ROM PICWT to the IC card expansion memory area or ROM
P13 PICWT starting at “D”.

F14 Program PGRD S The program specified using “S” is transferred into 3
P14 read from IC PPGRD the CPU from IC memory card and executes it.
memory card
F15 16-bit data XCH D1, D2 (D1)→(D2), (D2)→(D1) 5
P15 exchange PXCH
F16 32-bit data DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1)→(D2+1, D2) 5
P16 exchange PDXCH (D2+1, D2)→(D1+1, D1)
F17 Higher/lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of “D” are 3
P17 byte in 16-bit PSWAP exchanged.
data
exchange
F18 16-bit data BXCH D1, D2, D3 Exchange the data between “D1” and “D2” with the 7
P18 block PBXCH data specified by “D3”.
exchange
Control instruction
F19 Auxiliary SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction specified 3
jump by “S” and continues from there.
Binary arithmetic instructions
F20 16-bit data + S, D (D)+(S)→(D) 5
P20 addition P+
F21 32-bit data D+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P21 addition PD+
F22 16-bit data + S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)→(D) 7
P22 addition P+

14-64
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F11 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P11
F12 - - - - N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P12
F12 A A A A

F13 - - - - N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A

P13
P13 A A A A

F14 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P14

F15 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P15
F16 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P16
F17 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P17

F18 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P18

Control instruction
F19 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A

Binary arithmetic instructions

F20 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P20
F21 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P21
F22 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P22

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP-e/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions except for P13
(PICWT) instruction are not available.

14-65
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F23 32-bit data D+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11

P23 addition PD+
F25 16-bit data - S, D (D)-(S)→(D) 5
P25 subtraction P-
F26 32-bit data D- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P26 subtraction PD-
F27 16-bit data - S1, S2, D (S1)-(S2)→(D) 7
P27 subraction P-
F28 32-bit data D- S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11
P28 subtraction PD-
F30 16-bit data * S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D) 7
P30 multiplication P*
F31 32-bit data D* S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2, D+1, D) 11
P31 multiplication PD*
F32 16-bit data % S1, S2, D (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D) 7
P32 division P% remainder (DT9015 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/FP-M/FP3 or
DT90015 for FP0 T32/FPΣ/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH)
F33 32-bit data D% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient (D+1, D) 11
P33 division PD% remainder (DT9016, DT9015 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/
FP-M/FP3 or DT90016, DT90015 for FP0 T32/
FPΣ/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH)
F34 16-bit data *W S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)→(D) 7
P34 multiplication P*W
(result in 16
bits)
F35 16-bit data +1 D (D)+1→(D) 3
P35 increment P+1
F36 32-bit data D+1 D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D) 3
P36 increment PD+1

14-66
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F23 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P23
F25 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P25
F26 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P26
F27 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P27
F28 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P28
F30 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P30
F31 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P31
F32 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P32

F33 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P33

F34 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P34

F35 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P35
F36 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P36

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-67
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F37 16-bit data -1 D (D)-1→(D) 3

P37 decrement P-1
F38 32-bit data D-1 D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D) 3
P38 decrement PD-1
F39 32-bit data D*D S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)x(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11
P39 multiplication PD*D
(result in 32
bits)
BCD arithmetic instructions
F40 4-digit B+ S, D (D)+(S)→(D) 5
P40 BCD data PB+
addition
F41 8-digit DB+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P41 BCD data PDB+
addition
F42 4-digit B+ S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)→(D) 7
P42 BCD data PB+
addition
F43 8-digit DB+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11
P43 BCD data PDB+
addition
F45 4-digit B- S, D (D)-(S)→(D) 5
P45 BCD data PB-
subtraction
F46 8-digit DB- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P46 BCD data PDB-
subtraction
F47 4-digit B- S1, S2, D (S1)-(S2)→(D) 7
P47 BCD data PB-
subtraction

14-68
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F37 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P37
F38 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P38
F39 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P39

BCD arithmetic instructions

F40 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P40

F41 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P41

F42 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P42

F43 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P43

F45 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P45

F46 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P46

F47 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P47

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-69
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F48 8-digit DB- S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11

P48 BCD data PDB-
subraction
F50 4-digit B* S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D) 7
P50 BCD data PB*
multiplication
F51 8-digit DB* S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2, D+1, D) 11
P51 BCD data PDB*
multiplication
F52 4-digit B% S1, S2, D (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D) 7
P52 BCD data PB% remainder (DT9015 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/FP-M/FP3 or
division DT90015 for FP0 T32/FPΣ/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH)
F53 8-digit DB% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient (D+1, D) 11
P53 BCD data PDB% remainder (DT9016, DT9015 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/
division FP-M/FP3 or DT90016, DT90015 for FP0 T32/
FPΣ/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH)
F55 4-digit B+1 D (D)+1→(D) 3
P55 BCD data PB+1
increment
F56 8-digit DB+1 D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D) 3
P56 BCD data PDB+1
increment
F57 4-digit B-1 D (D)-1→(D) 3
P57 BCD data PB-1
decrement
F58 8-digit DB-1 D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D) 3
P58 BCD data PDB-1
decrement

14-70
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F48 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P48

F50 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P50

F51 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P51

F52 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P52

F53 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P53

F55 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P55

F56 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P56

F57 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P57

F58 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P58

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-71
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Data compare instructions

F60 16-bit data CMP S1, S2 (S1)>(S2)→R900A: on 5
P60 compare PCMP (S1)=(S2)→R900B: on
(S1)<(S2)→R900C: on
F61 32-bit data DCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→R900A: on 9
P61 compare PDCMP (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→R900B: on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on
F62 16-bit data WIN S1, S2, S3 (S1)>(S3)→R900A: on 7
P62 band PWIN (S2)< or=(S1)< or=(S3)→R900B: on
compare (S1)<(S2)→R900C: on
F63 32-bit data DWIN S1, S2, S3 (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→R900A: on 13
P63 band PDWIN (S2+1, S2)< or=(S1+1, S1)< or=(S3+1,
compare S3)→R900B: on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on
F64 Block data BCMP S1, S2, S3 Compares the two blocks beginning with “S2” and 7
P64 compare PBCMP “S3” to see if they are equal.
Logic operation instructions
F65 16-bit data WAN S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2)→(D) 7
P65 AND PWAN
F66 16-bit data WOR S1, S2, D (S1) OR (S2)→(D) 7
P66 OR PWOR
F67 16-bit data XOR S1, S2, D {(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}→(D) 7
P67 exclusive OR PXOR
F68 16-bit data XNR S1, S2, D {(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}→(D) 7
P68 exclusive PXNR
NOR
F69 16-bit data WUNI S1, S2, S3, ([S1] AND [S3]) OR ([S2] AND [S3])→(D) 9
P69 unite PWUNI D When (S3) is H0, (S2)→(D)
When (S3) is HFFFF, (S1) →(D)

14-72
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Data compare instructions

F60 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P60

F61 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P61

F62 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P62

F63 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P63

F64 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P64
Logic operation instructions
F65 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P65
F66 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P66
F67 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P67
F68 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P68

F69 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P69

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-73
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Data conversion instructions

F70 Block check BCC S1, S2, S3, Creates the code for checking the data specified by 9
P70 code PBCC D “S2” and “S3” and stores it in “D”.
calculation The calculation method is specified by “S1”.
F71 Hexadecimal HEXA S1, S2, D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by “S1” 7
P71 data → ASCII PHEXA and “S2” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”.
code Example: HABCD→ H 42 41 44 43
B A D C
F72 ASCII code AHEX S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and 7
P72 → Hexadeci- PAHEX “S2” to hexadecimal data and stores it in “D”.
mal data Example: H 44 43 42 41 → HCDAB
D C B A
F73 4-digit BCD BCDA S1, S2, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 7
P73 data → ASCII PBCDA “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”.
code Example: H1234→ H 32 31 34 33
2 1 4 3
F74 ASCII code ABCD S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and 9
P74 → 4-digit PABCD “S2” to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”.
BCD data Example: H 34 33 32 31 → H3412
4 3 2 1
F75 16-bit binary BINA S1, S2, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by 7
P75 data → ASCII PBINA “S1” to ASCII code and stores it in “D” (area of “S2”
code bytes).
Example: K-100→ H 30 30 31 2D 20 20
0 0 1 -
F76 ASCII code ABIN S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and 7
P76 → 16-bit PABIN “S2” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”.
binary data Example: H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 → K-100
0 0 1 -
F77 32-bit binary DBIA S1, S2, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data (S1+1, S1) to 11
P77 data → ASCII PDBIA ASCII code and stores it in D (area of “S2” bytes).
code

14-74
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Data conversion instructions

F70 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P70

F71 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P71

F72 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P72

F73 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P73

F74 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P74

F75 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P75

F76 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P76

F77 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P77

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-75
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F78 ASCII code DABI S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and 11
P78 → 32-bit PDABI “S2” to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in (D+1,
binary data D).
F80 16-bit binary BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by “S” 5
P80 data → PBCD to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”.
4-digit BCD Example: K100 → H100
data
F81 4-digit BCD BIN S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 5
P81 data → 16-bit PBIN “S” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”.
binary data Example: H100 → K100
F82 32-bit binary DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by 7
P82 data → PDBCD (S+1, S) to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in
8-digit BCD (D+1, D).
data
F83 8-digit BCD DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by 7
P83 data → 32-bit PDBIN (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in
binary data (D+1, D).
F84 16-bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of “D”. 3
P84 invert (com- PINV
plement of 1)
F85 16-bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds 1 (inverts 3
P85 complement PNEG the sign).
of 2
F86 32-bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and adds 1 3
P86 complement PDNEG (inverts the sign).
of 2
F87 16-bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of “D”. 3
P87 absolute PABS

14-76
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F78 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P78

F80 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P80

F81 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P81

F82 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P82

F83 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P83

F84 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P84

F85 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P85

F86 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P86

F87 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P87

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-77
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F88 32-bit data DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of (D+1, D). 3
P88 absolute PDABS
F89 16-bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32 bits in (D+1, 3
P89 sign PEXT D).
extension
F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. 7
P90 PDECO The part is specified by “n”.
F91 7-segment SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-segment 5
P91 decode PSEGT display and stores it in (D+1, D).
F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. 7
P92 PENCO The part is specified by “n”.
F93 16-bit data UNIT S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the “n” words 7
P93 combine PUNIT of data beginning at “S” are stored (united) in order
in “D”.
F94 16-bit data DIST S, n, D Each of the digits of the data of “S” are stored in 7
P94 distribute PDIST (distriuted to) the least significant digits of the areas
beginning at “D”.
F95 Character→ ASC S, D Twelve characters of the characer constants of “S” 15
P95 ASCII code PASC are converted to ASCII code and stored in “D” to
“D+5”.
F96 16-bit table SRC S1, S2, S3 The data of “S1” is searched for in the areas in the 7
P96 data search PSRC range “S2” to “S3” and the result is stored in
DT9037 and DT9038 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/FP-M/FP3
and DT90037 and DT90038 for FP0 T32/FPΣ/
FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH.

F97 32-bit table DSRC S1, S2, S3 The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched for in the 32-bit 11
P97 data search PDSRC data designated by “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and
the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038.
Data shift instructions
F98 Data table CMPR D1, D2, D3 Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of the data 7
P98 shift-out and PCMPR between “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed,
compress and shifted in order toward “D2”.

14-78
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F88 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P88
F89 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P89

F90 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P90
F91 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P91
F92 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P92
F93 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P93

F94 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P94

F95 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P95

F96 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P96

F97 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P97

Data shift instructions

F98 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P98

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-79
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F99 Data table CMPW S, D1, D2 Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the data between 7
P99 shift-in and PCMPW “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed, and
compress shifted in order toward “D2”.
F100 Right shift of SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right. 5
P100 multiple bits PSHR
(n bits) in a
16-bit data
F101 Left shift of SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left. 5
P101 multiple bits PSHL
(n bits) in a
16-bit data
F102 Right shift of DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified 5
P102 n bits in a 32- PDSHR by (D+1, D) to the right.
bit data
F103 Left shift of n DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified 5
P103 bits in a 32- PDSHL by (D+1, D) to the left.
bit data
F105 Right shift of BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the right. 3
P105 one hexade- PBSR
cimal digit
(4-bit)
F106 Left shift of BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the left. 3
P106 one hexade- PBSL
cimal digit
(4-bit)
F108 Right shift of BITR D1, D2, n Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to 7
P108 multiple bits PBITR the right.
(n bits)
F109 Left shift of BITL D1, D2, n Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to 7
P109 multiple bits PBITL the left.
(n bits)
F110 Right shift of WSHR D1, D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” 5
P110 one word PWSHR to the right.
(16-bit)
F111 Left shift of WSHL D1, D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” 5
P111 one word PWSHL to the left.
(16-bit)
F112 Right shift of WBSR D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to 5
P112 one hexade- PWBSR the right.
cimal digit
(4-bit)

14-80
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F99 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A

P99

F100 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P100

F101 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P101

F102 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P102

F103 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P103

F105 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P105

F106 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P106

F108 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P108

F109 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P109

F110 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P110

F111 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P111

F112 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P112

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-81
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F113 Left shift of WBSL D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to 5
P113 one hexade- PWBSL the left.
cimal digit
(4-bit)
FIFO instructions
F115 FIFO buffer FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are defined in the 5
P115 define PFIFT buffer.
F116 Data read FIFR S, D The oldest data beginning from “S” that was written 5
P116 from FIFO PFIFR to the buffer is read and stored in “D”.
buffer
F117 Data write FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer starting from 5
P117 into FIFO PFIFW “D”.
buffer
Basic function instructions
F118 UP/DOWN UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value preset in “S” and 5
counter stores the elapsed value in “D”.
F119 Left/right LRSR D1, D2 Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area 5
shift register between “D1” and “D2” as the register.
Data rotate instructions
F120 16-bit data ROR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to the right. 5
P120 right rotate PROR
F121 16-bit data ROL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to the left. 5
P121 left rotate PROL
F122 16-bit data RCR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” 5
P122 right rotate PRCR plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the right.
with carry
flag (R9009)
data
F123 16-bit data RCL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” 5
P123 left rotate PRCL plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the left.
with carry
flag (R9009)
data

14-82
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F113 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P113

FIFO instructions
F115 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P115
F116 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P116

F117 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A

P117

Basic function instructions

F118 A A A A A A A A A A A A A

F119 A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Data rotate instructions

F120 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P120
F121 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P121
F122 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P122

F123 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P123

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-83
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F125 32-bit data DROR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P125 right rotate PDROR double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
the right.
F126 32-bit data DROL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P126 left rotate PDROL double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
the left.
F127 32-bit data DRCR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P127 right rotate PDRCR double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
with carry the right together with carry flag (R9009) data.
flag (R9009)
data
F128 32-bit data DRCL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P128 left rotate PDRCL double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
with carry the left together with carry flag (R9009) data.
flag (R9009)
data
Bit manipulation instructions
F130 16-bit data bit BTS D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 5
P130 set PBTS 1.
F131 16-bit data bit BTR D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 5
P131 reset PBTR 0.
F132 16-bit data BTI D, n Invert the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D”. 5
P132 invert PBTI
F133 16-bit data bit BTT D, n Test the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” 5
P133 test PBTT and output the result to R900B.
F135 Number of on BCU S, D Store the number of on bits in the data of “S” in “D”. 5
P135 (1) bits in PBCU
16-bit data
F136 Number of on DBCU S, D Store the number of on bits in the data of (S+1, S) 7
P136 (1) bits in PDBCU in “D”.
32-bit data

14-84
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F125 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P125

F126 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P126

F127 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P127

F128 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P128

Bit manipulation instructions

F130 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P130
F131 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P131
F132 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P132
F133 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P133
F135 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P135

F136 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P136

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-85
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Basic function instruction

F137 Auxiliary STMR S, D Turn on the specified output and R900D after 0.01 5
timer (16-bit) s × set value.
Special instructions
F138 Hours, min- HMSS S, D Converts the hour, minute and second data of 5
P138 utes and sec- PHMSS (S+1, S) to seconds data, and the converted data is
onds to stored in (D+1, D).
seconds data
F139 Seconds to SHMS S, D Converts the seconds data of (S+1, S) to hour, 5
P139 hours, PSHMS minute and second data, and the converted data is
minutes and stored in (D+1, D).
seconds data
F140 Carry flag STC - Turns on the carry flag (R9009). 1
P140 (R9009) set PSTC
F141 Carry flag CLC - Turns off the carry flag (R9009). 1
P141 (R9009) reset PCLC

14-86
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Basic function instruction

F137 A A A A N/A N/A A N/A A A A A A

Special instructions
F138 Partly A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P138 N/A
Note2)

F139 Partly A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P139 N/A
Note2)

F140 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P140
F141 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P141

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 type.

14-87
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F142 Watching WDT S The time (allowable scan time for the system) of 3
P142 dog timer PWDT watching dog timer is changed to “S” × 0.1 (ms) for
update that scan.
F143 Partial I/O IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number specified by “D1” 5
P143 update PIORF to the number specified by “D2”.
F144 Serial data TRNS S, n The COM port received flag (R9038) is set to off to 5
communica- enable reception.
tion control Beginning at “S”, “n” bytes of the data registers are
sent from the COM port.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N Sends the data to another station in the network 9
P145 PSEND (MEWNET).
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D Receives the data to another station in the network 9
P146 PRECV (MEWNET).
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N Sends the data to the slave station as the MOD 9
P145 bus master.
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D Receives the data from the slave station as the 9
P146 MOD bus master.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N Sends the data to the slave station as the 9
P145 MEWTOCOL master.
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D Receives the data from the slave station as the 9
P146 MEWTOCOL master.
F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting 5
with “S” for printing, and outputs it to the word
external output relay WY specified by “D”.
F148 Self- ERR n Stores the self-diagnostic error number “n” in 3
P148 diagnostic PERR (n: k100 to (DT9000 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/FP-M/FP3 or DT90000
error set K299) for FP0 T32/FPΣ/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH), turns
R9000 on, and turns on the ERROR LED.

14-88
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

F142 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P142

F143 A A A A N/A A A A A A A A A
P143
F144 A N/A A A N/A A A N/A A N/A A A A

F145 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P145
F146 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P146
F145 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P145 N/A
Note2)

F146 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P146 N/A
Note2)

F145 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P145 N/A N/A
Note2) Note2)

F146 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P146 N/A N/A
Note2) Note2)

F147 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

F148 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A

P148

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.20 or later and FPΣ 32k.

14-89
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F149 Message MSG S Displays the character constant of “S” in the 13

P149 display PMSG connected programming tool.
F150 Data read READ S1, S2, n, Reads the data from the intelligent unit. 9
P150 from intelli- PREAD D
gent unit
F151 Data write WRT S1, S2, n, Writes the data into the intelligent unit. 9
P151 into intelli- PWRT D
gent unit
F152 Data read RMRD S1, S2, n, Reads the data from the intelligent unit at the 9
P152 from PRMRD D MEWNET-F (remote I/O) slave station.
MEWNET-F
slave station
F153 Data write RMWT S1, S2, n, Writes the data into the intelligent unit at the 9
P153 into PRMWT D MEWNET-F (remote I/O) slave station.
MEWNET-F
slave station
F154 Machine MCAL n The machine language program is called. 3
P154 language PMCAL
program call
F155 Sampling SMPL - Starts sampling data. 1
P155 PSMPL

F156 Sampling STRG - When the trigger of this instruction turns on, the 1
P156 trigger PSTRG sampling trace stops.

F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, D The time after (S2+1, S2) elapses from the time of 9
P157 PCADD (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, D).

F158 Time CSUB S1, S2, D The time that results from subtracting (S2+1, S2) 9
P158 substruction PCSUB from the time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2,
D+1, D).

F159 Serial port MTRN S, n, D This is used to send data to an external device 7
P159 communica- PMTRN through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM
tion port.
F161 MCU serial MRCV S, D1, D2 Data is received from external equipment via the 7
P161 port PMRCV COM port of the specified MCU.
reception

14-90
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F149 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P149
F150 N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P150 N/A
Note2)

F151 N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P151 N/A
Note2)

F152 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P152

F153 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P153

F154 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A N/A N/A
P154

F155 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P155 N/A N/A
Note6) Note5)

F156 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P156 N/A N/A
Note6) Note5)

F157 Partly A A A N/A A A A A A A A A

P157 N/A
Note3

F158 Partly A A A N/A A A A A A A A A

P158 N/A
Note3

F159 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P159 N/A N/A
Note4 Note4

F161 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P161 N/A N/A
Note4 Note4

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 2.0 or later.
Note3) This instruction is available for T32 type.
Note4) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.
Note5) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later.
Note6) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.

14-91
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

BIN arithmetic instruction

F160 Double word DSQR S, D √(S)→(D) 7
P160 (32-bit) data PDSQR
square root
Special instructions (High-speed counter instructions)
F0 High-speed MV S, DT9052 Performs high-speed counter and Pulse output 5
counter and controls according to the control code specified by
Pulse output “S”. The control code is stored in DT9052.
controls
F1 Change and DMV S, DT9044 Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed counter and 7
read of the Pulse output elapsed value area (DT9045,
elapsed value DT9044).
of high-speed DT9044, D Transfers value in high-speed counter and Pulse 7
counter and output elapsed value area (DT9045, DT9044) to
Pulse output (D+1, D).
F162 High-speed HC0S S, Yn The specified external output relay (Yn) turns on 7
counter output when the elapsed value of the high-speed counter
set agrees with the specified target value (S+1, S).
F163 High-speed HC0R S, Yn The specified external output relay (Yn) turns off 7
counter output when the elapsed value of the high-speed counter
reset agrees with the specified target value (S+1, S).
F164 Speed control SPD0 S Controls conditions of outputs according to the 3
(Pulse output elapsed value of the high-speed counter. Two
and pattern types of output control available:
output con- - Pulse output control
trols) (See - Pattern output control
below.)
F165 Cam control CAM0 S Controls cam operation (on/off patterns of each 3
cam output) according to the elapsed value of the
high-speed counter.

Pulse output specifications for FP-M/FP1

Item FP1 C14/C16, FP-M C16T FP1 C24/C40 FP1 C56/C72
FP-M C20T/C20R/C32T
Pulse output terminal Y7 Y7 Y6 and Y7 (selectable)
Pulse frequency 1440 Hz to 5 kHz/720 Hz to 5 kHz/360 Hz to 5kHz/180 Hz to 5 kHz/90 Hz to 5 kHz/45
Hz to 5 kHz (Switches between 6 ranges)
Internal connection Not possible Not possible Possible
between pulse output
and counter input
Switching of the pulse frequency range is supported by CPU Ver. 2.7 or later.

In versions prior to CPU Ver. 2.7, the range is fixed at 360 Hz to 5 kHz.

In Ver. 2.7 or later but prior to CPU Ver. 2.9, switching is possible among 4 ranges (360 Hz to 5 kHz/180
Hz to 5 kHz/90 Hz to 5 kHz/45 Hz to 5 kHz).

In CPU Ver. 2.9 and later versions, switching is possible among 6 ranges.

14-92
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

BIN arithmetic instruction

F160 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P160

Special instructions (High-speed counter instructions)

F0 A N/A N/A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F1 A N/A N/A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F162 N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F163 N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F164 N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F165 N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used.

14-93
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0, FP-e

F166 High-speed HC1S n, S, Yn Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the 11
counter built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value
output set of (S+1, S).
(with channel
specification)
F167 High-speed HC1R n, S, Yn Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the 11
counter built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value
output reset of (S+1, S).
(with channel
specification)
F168 Positioning SPD1 S, n Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified 5
control (with output (Y0 or Y1) according to the contents of the
channel data table beginning at “S”.
specification)
F169 Pulse output PLS S, n Outputs a pulse from the specified output (Y0 or 5
(with channel Y1) according to the contents of the data table
specification) beginning at “S”.
F170 PWM output PWM S, n Performs PWM output from the specified outptu 5
(with channel (Y0 or Y1) according to the contents of the data
specification) table beginning at “S”.

14-94
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0, FP-e

F166 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F167 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F168 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F169 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F170 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used.

14-95
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FPΣ/FP-X

F0 High-speed MV S, DT90052 Performs high-speed counter and Pulse output 5
counter and controls according to the control code specified by
Pulse output “S”. The control code is stored in DT90052.
controls
F1 Change and DMV FPΣ: Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed counter and 7
read of the S, DT90044 Pulse output elapsed value area (DT90045,
elapsed value FP-X: DT90044).
of high-speed S, DT90300
counter and FPΣ: Transfers value in high-speed counter and Pulse 7
Pulse output DT90044, D output elapsed value area (DT90045, DT90044) to
FP-X: (D+1, D).
DT90300, D
F166 Target value HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the 11
much on built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value
(with channel of (S+1, S).
specification)
F167 Target value HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the 11
much off built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value
(with channel of (S+1, S).
specification)
F171 Pulse output SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output from the specified 5
(with channel channel, in accordance with the contents of the
specification) data table that starts with S.
(Trapezoidal
control and
home return)
F172 Pulse output PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the specified output, 5
(with channel in accordance with the contents of the data table
specification) that starts with S.
(JOG
operation)
F173 PWM output PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the specified output, in 5
(with channel accordance with the contents of the data table that
specification) starts with S.

F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the specified channel 5
(with channel according to the data table specified by S.
specification)
(Selectable
data table
control
operation )
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with 5
(Linear the designated data table, so that the path to the
interpolation) target position forms a straight line.

F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with 5
(Circular the designated data table, so that the path to the
interpolation) target position forms an arc.

14-96
 Availability (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FPΣ/FP-X

F0 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F1 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F166 A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F167 A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F171 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F172 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F173 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F174 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F175 N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F176 N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3)

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels.
Note3) This instruction is available for FPΣ C32T2,C28T2,C32T2H and C28T2H.

14-97
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Screen display instructions

F180 FP-e screen SCR S1, S2, S3, Register the screen displayed on the FP-e. 9
display S4
registration
F181 FP-e screen DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed on the FP-e. 3
display
switching
Basic function instruction
F182 Time FILTR S1, S2, S3, Executes the filter processing for the specified 9
constant D input.
processing
F183 Auxiliary DSTM S, D Turn on the specified output and R900D after 7
timer (32-bit) 0.01 s. × set value.
Data transfer instructions
F190 Three 16-bit MV3 S1, S2, S3, (S1)→(D), (S2)→(D+1), (S3)→(D+2) 10
P190 data move PMV3 D
F191 Three 32-bit DMV3 S1, S2, S3, (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D), (S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2), 16
P191 data move PDMV3 D (S3+1, S3)→(D+5, D+4)
Logic operation instructions
F215 32-bit data DAND S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 12
P215 AND PDAND
F216 32-bit data DOR S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) OR (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 12
P216 OR PDOR
F217 32-bit data DXOR S1, S2, D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR {(S1+1, S1) AND 12
P217 XOR PDXOR (S2+1, S2)}→(D+1, D)
F218 32-bit data DXNR S1, S2, D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR {(S1+1, S1) AND 12
P218 XNR PDXNR (S2+1, S2)}→(D+1, D)
F219 Double word DUNI S1, S2, S3, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S3+1, S3)} OR {(S2+1, S2) AND 16
P219 (32-bit) data PDUNI D (S3+1, S3)}→(D+1, D)
unites
Data conversion instructions
F230 Time data → TMSEC S, D The specified time data ( a date and time) is 6
P230 second PTMSEC changed to the second data.
conversion
F231 Second SECTM S, D The specified second data is changed into time 6
P231 data→ time PSECTM data (a date and time).
conversion

14-98
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Screen display instructions

F180 N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

F181 N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Basic function instruction

F182 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Note5) Note4)

F183 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A A A A

Data transfer instructions

F190 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P190
F191 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P191
Logic operation instructions
F215 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P215
F216 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P216
F217 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P217
F218 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P218
F219 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P219

Data conversion instructions

F230 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P230 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3) Note6) Note2 Note2

F231 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P231 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3) Note6) Note2 Note2

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.
Note3) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k.
Note4) This function is available for FP-X Ver2.0 or later.
Note5) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver 3.10 or later.
Note6) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.13 or later.

14-99
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F235 16-bit binary GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of “S” to gray 6
P235 data → Gray PGRY codes, and the converted result is stored in the “D”.
code
conversion
F236 32-bit binary DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of (S+1, S) to gray 8
P236 data → Gray PDGRY code, and the converted result is stored in the
code (D+1, D).
conversion
F237 16-bit gray GBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to binary data, and 6
P237 code → PGBIN the converted result is stored in the “D”.
binary data
conversion
F238 32-bit gray DGBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of (S+1, S) to binary data, 8
P238 code → PDGBIN and the converted result is stored in the (D+1, D).
binary data
conversion
F240 Bit line to bit COLM S, n, D The values of bits 0 to 15 of “S” are stored in bit “n” 8
P240 column PCOLM of (D to DC+15).
conversion
F241 Bit column to LINE S, n, D The values of bit “n” of (S) to (S+15) are stored in 8
P241 bit line PLINE bits 0 to 15 of “D”.
conversion
F250 Binary data BTOA S1, S2, n, D Converts multiple binary data to multiple ASCII 12
→ ASCII data.
conversion
F251 ASCII → ATOB S1, S2, n, D Converts multiple ASCII data to multiple binary 12
binary data data.
conversion
F252 ASCII data ACHK S1, S2, n Checks the ASCII data strings to be used in F251 10
check (ATOB) instruction.

Character strings instructions

F257 Comparing SCMP S1, S2 These instructions compare two specified character 10
P257 character strings and output the judgment results to a special
strings internal relay.
F258 Character SADD S1, S2, D These instructions couple one character string with 12
P258 string another.
coupling
F259 Number of LEN S, D These instructions determine the number of 6
P259 characters in characters in a character string.
a character
string
F260 Search for SSRC S1, S2, D The specified character is searched in a character 10
P260 character string.
string
F261 Retrieving RIGHT S1, S2, D These instructions retrieve a specified number of 8
P261 data from characters from the right side of the character
character string.
strings (right
side)

14-100
 Availability A: Available, N/A: Not available
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F235 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P235

F236 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P236

F237 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P237

F238 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P238

F240 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P240

F241 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P241

F250 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
Note2

F251 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
Note2

F252 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Note4) Note3)

Character strings instructions

F257 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P257

F258 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P258

F259 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P259

F260 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P260

F261 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P261

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k.
Note3) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver2.0 or later.
Note4) This instruction is available for FP FPΣ Ver3.10 or later.

14-101
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F262 Retrieving LEFT S1, S2, D These instructions retrieve a specified number of 8
P262 data from characters from the left side of the character string.
character
strings (left
side)
F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1, S2, S3, These instructions retrieve a character string 10
P263 character D consisting of a specified number of characters from
string from a the specified position in the character string.
character
string
F264 Writing a MIDW S1, S2, D, These instructions write a specified number of 12
P264 character n characters from a character string to a specified
string to a position in the character string.
character
string
F265 Replacing SREP S, D, p, n A specified number of characters in a character 12
P265 character string are rewritten, starting from a specified
strings position in the character string.
Integer type data processing instructions
F270 Maximum MAX S1, S2, D Searches the maximum value in the word data 8
P270 value (word PMAX table between the “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in
data (16-bit)) the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in
“D+1”.
F271 Maximum DMAX S1, S2, D Searches for the maximum value in the double 8
P271 value (double PDMAX word data table between the area selected with
word data “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address
(32-bit)) relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F272 Minimum MIN S1, S2, D Searches for the minimum value in the word data 8
P272 value (word PMIN table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
data (16-bit)) and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1”
is stored in “D+1”.
F273 Minimum DMIN S1, S2, D Searches for the minimum value in the double word 8
P273 value (double PDMIN data table between the area selected with “S1” and
word data “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative
(32-bit)) to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F275 Total and MEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the word 8
P275 mean values PMEAN data with sign from the area selected with “S1” to
(word data “S2” are obtained and stored in the “D”.
(16-bit))
F276 Total and DMEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the double 8
P276 mean values PDMEAN word data with sign from the area selected with
(double word “S1” to “S2” are obtained and stored in the “D”.
data (32-bit))

14-102
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F262 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P262

F263 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P263

F264 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P264

F265 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P265

Integer type data processing instructions

F270 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P270 N/A
Note2

F271 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P271 N/A
Note2

F272 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P272 N/A
Note2

F273 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P273 N/A
Note2

F275 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P275 N/A
Note2

F276 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P276 N/A
Note2

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver. 1.2 or later.

14-103
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F277 Sort (word SORT S1, S2, S3 The word data with sign from the area specified by 8
P277 data (16-bit)) PSORT “S1” to “S2” are sorted in ascending order (the
smallest word is first) or descending order (the
largest word is first).
F278 Sort (double DSORT S1, S2, S3 The double word data with sign from the area 8
P278 word data PDSORT specified b “S1” ato “S2” are sorted in ascending
(32-bit)) order (the smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F282 Scaling of SCAL S1, S2, D The toutptu value Y is found for the input value X 8
P282 16-bit data PSCAL by performing scaling for the given data table.

F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1, S2, D The toutptu value Y is found for the input value X 10
P283 32-bit data PDSCAL by performing scaling for the given data table.
F284 Inclination RAMP S1, S2, S3, Executes the linear output for the specified time 10
P284 output of 16- D from the specified initial value to the target value.
bit data
Integer type non-linear function instructions
F285 Upper and LIMT S1, S2, S3, When S1>S3, S1→D 10
P285 lower limit PLIMT D When S1<S3, S2→D
control When S1<or = S3<or = S2, S3→D
(16-bit data)
F286 Upper and DLIMT S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) 16
P286 lower limit PDLIMT D →(D+1, D)
control When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2)
(32-bit data) →(D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or = (S2+1, S2),
(S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)
F287 Deadband BAND S1, S2, S3, When S1>S3, S3−S1→D 10
P287 control PBAND D When S2<S3, S3−S2→D
(16-bit data) When S1<or = S3<or = S2, 0→D
F288 Deadband DBAND S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, 16
P288 control PDBAND D S1)→(D+1, D)
(32-bit data) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1,
S2)→(D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or = (S2+1,
S2),0→(D+1, D)
F289 Zone control ZONE S1, S2, S3, When S3<0, S3+S1→D 10
P289 (16-bit data) PZONE D When S3=0, 0→D
When S3>0, S3+S2→D
F290 Zone control DZONE S1, S2, S3, When (S3+1, S3)<0, (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1) 16
P290 (32-bit data) PDZONE D →(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)=0, 0→(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)>0, (S3+1, S3)+(S2+1, S2)
→(D+1, D)

14-104
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F277 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P277 N/A
Note2)

F278 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P278 N/A
Note2)

F282 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P282 N/A
Note2)

F283 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P283
F284 N/A N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P284 N/A
Note3)

Integer type non-linear function instructions

F285 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P285 N/A
Note2)

F286 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P286 N/A
Note2)

F287 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P287 N/A
Note2)

F288 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P288 N/A
Note2)

F289 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P289 N/A
Note2)

F290 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P290 N/A
Note2)

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver. 1.2 or later.
Note3) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver 2.0 or later and FPsigma Ver.3.10 or later.

14-105
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

BCD type real number operation instructions

F300 BCD type BSIN S, D SIN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6
P300 sine PBSIN
operation
F301 BCD type BCOS S, D COS(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6
P301 cosine PBCOS
operation
F302 BCD type BTAN S, D TAN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6
P302 tangent PBTAN
operation
-1
F303 BCD type BASIN S, D SIN (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6
P303 arcsine PBASIN
operation
-1
F304 BCD type BACOS S, D COS (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6
P304 arccosine PBACOS
operation
-1
F305 BCD type BATAN S, D TAN (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6
P305 arctangent PBATAN
operation

14-106
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

BCD type real number operation instructions

F300 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P300

F301 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P301

F302 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P302

F303 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P303

F304 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P304

F305 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P305

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-107
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Floating-point type real number operation instructions

F309 Floating- FMV S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 8
P309 point type PFMV
data move
F310 Floating- F+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14
P310 point type PF+
data addition
F311 Floating- F- S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14
P311 point type PF-
data
subtraction
F312 Floating- F* S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)×(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14
P312 point type PF*
data
multiplication
F313 Floating- F% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14
P313 point type PF%
data division
F314 Floating- SIN S, D SIN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P314 point type PSIN
data sine
operation
F315 Floating- COS S, D COS(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P315 point type PCOS
data cosine
operation
F316 Floating- TAN S, D TAN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P316 point type PTAN
data tangent
operation
-1
F317 Floating- ASIN S, D SIN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P317 point type PASIN
data arcsine
operation
-1
F318 Floating- ACOS S, D COS (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P318 point type PACOS
data
arccosine
operation

14-108
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Floating-point type real number operation instructions

F309 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P309

F310 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P310

F311 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P311

F312 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P312

F313 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P313

F314 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P314

F315 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P315

F316 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P316

F317 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P317

F318 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P318

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-109
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

-1
F319 Floating- ATAN S, D TAN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P319 point type PATAN
data
arctangent
operation
F320 Floating- LN S, D LN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P320 point type PLN
data natural
logarithm
F321 Floating- EXP S, D EXP(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P321 point type PEXP
data
exponent
F322 Floating- LOG S, D LOG(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P322 point type PLOG
data
logarithm
F323 Floating- PWR S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14
P323 point type PPWR
data power
F324 Floating- FSQR S, D 10
√(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P324 point type PFSQR
data square
root
F325 16-bit integer FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data with sign specified 6
P325 data to PFLT by “S” to real number data, and the converted data
floating-point is stored in “D”.
type data
conversion
F326 32-bit integer DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data with sign specified 8
P326 data to PDFLT by (S+1, S) to real number data, and the converted
floating-point data is stored in (D+1, D).
type data
conversion

14-110
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F319 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P319

F320 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P320

F321 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P321

F322 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P322

F323 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P323

F324 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P324

F325 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P325

F326 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P326

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-111
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F327 Floating- INT S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to 8

P327 point type PINT the 16-bit integer data with sign (the largest integer
data to 16-bit not exceeding the floating-point data), and the
integer con- converted data is stored in “D”.
version (the
largest inte-
ger not ex-
ceeding the
floating-point
type data)
F328 Floating- DINT S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to 8
P328 point type PDINT the 32-bit integer data with sign (the largest integer
data to 32-bit not exceeding the floating-point data), and the
integer con- converted data is stored in (D+1, D).
version (the
largest inte-
ger not ex-
ceeding the
floating-point
type data)
F329 Floating- FIX S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to 8
P329 point type PFIX the 16-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first
data to 16-bit decimal point down), and the converted data is
integer con- stored in “D”.
version
(rounding the
first decimal
point down
to integer)
F330 Floating- DFIX S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to 8
P330 point type PDFIX the 32-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first
data to 32-bit decimal point down), and the converted data is
integer con- stored in (D+1, D).
version
(rounding the
first decimal
point down
to integer)

14-112
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F327 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P327

F328 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P328

F329 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P329

F330 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P330

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-113
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F331 Floating- ROFF S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to 8

P331 point type PROFF the 16-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first
data to 16-bit decimal point off), and the converted data is stored
integer con- in “D”.
version
(rounding the
first decimal
point off to
integer)
F332 Floating- DROFF S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to 8
P332 point type PDROFF the 32-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first
data to 32-bit decimal point off), and the converted data is stored
integer con- in (D+1, D).
version
(rounding the
first decimal
point off to
integer)
F333 Floating- FINT S, D The decimal part of the real number data specified 8
P333 point type PFINT in (S+1, S) is rounded down, and the result is
data round- stored in (D+1, D).
ding the first
decimal point
down
F334 Floating- FRINT S, D The decimal part of the real number data stored in 8
P334 point type PFRINT (S+1, S) is rounded off, and the result is stored in
data round- (D+1, D).
ding the first
decimal point
off
F335 Floating- F+/- S, D The real number data stored in (S+1, S) is changed 8
P335 point type PF+/- the sign, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).
data sign
changes
F336 Floating- FABS S, D Takes the absolute value of real number data 8
P336 point type PFABS specified by (S+1, S), and the result (absolute
data absolute value) is stored in (D+1, D).
F337 Floating- RAD S, D The data in degrees of an angle specified in (S+1, 8
P337 point type PRAD S) is converted to radians (real number data), and
data degree the result is stored in (D+1, D).
→ radian

14-114
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F331 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P331

F332 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P332

F333 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P333

F334 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P334

F335 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P335

F336 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P336

F337 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P337

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-115
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F338 Floating- DEG S, D The angle data in radians (real number data) 8
P338 point type PDEG specified in (S+1, S) is converted to angle data in
data radian degrees, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).
→ degree
Floating-point type real number data processing instructions
F345 Floating- FCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→ R900A: on 10
P345 point type PFCMP (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→ R900B on
data compare (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
F346 Floating- FWIN S1, S2, S3 (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→ R900A: on 14
P346 point type PFWIN (S2+1, S2)<or =(S1+1, S1)<or =(S3+1, S3)
data band → R900B on
compare (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
F347 Floating- FLIMT S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) 17
P347 point type PFLIMT D →(D+1, D)
data upper When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2)
and lower → (D+1, D)
limit control When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or =(S2+1, S2),
(S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)
F348 Floating- FBAND S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), 17
P348 point type PFBAND D (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
data dead- When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
band control (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1, S2)→ (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or =(S2+1, S2),
0.0→(D+1, D)
F349 Floating- FZONE S1, S2, S3, When (S3+1, S3)<0.0, 17
P349 point type PFZONE D (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
data zone When (S3+1, S3)=0.0, 0.0→ (D+1, D)
control When (S3+1, S3)>0.0, (S3+1, S3)+(S2+1, S2)
→(D+1, D)
F350 Floating- FMAX S1, S2, D Searches the maximum value in the real number 8
P350 point type PFMAX data table between the area selected with “S1” and
data maxi- “S2”, and stores it in the (D+1, D). The address
mum value relative to “S1” is stored in (D+2).

14-116
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F338 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P338

Floating-point type real number data processing instructions

F345 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P345

F346 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P346

F347 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P347

F348 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P348

F349 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

P349

F350 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P350

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-117
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

F351 Floating- FMIN S1, S2, D Searches the minimum value in the real number 8
P351 point type PFMIN data table between the area selected with “S1” and
data mini- “S2”, and stores it in the (D+1, D). The address
mum value relative to “S1” is stored in (D+2).
F352 Floating- FMEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the real 8
P352 point type PFMEAN number data from the area selected with “S1” to
data total and “S2” are obtained. The total value is stored in the
mean values (D+1, D) and the mean value is stored in the (D+3,
D+2).
F353 Floating- FSORT S1, S2, S3 The real number data from the area speciified by 8
P353 point type PFSORT “S1” to “S2” are stored in ascending order (the
data sort smallest word is first) or descending order (the
largest word is first).
F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1, S2, D Scaling (linearization) on a real number data table 12
P354 real number PFSCAL is performed, and the output (Y) to an input value
data (X) is calculated.
Time series processing instruction
F355 PID PID S PID processing is performed depending on the 4
processing control value (mode and parameter) specified by (S
to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), and the result is stored
in the (S+3).
F356 Eaay PID EZPID S1, S2, S3, Temperature control (PID) can be easily performed 10
S4 using the image of a temperautre controller.

Compare instructions
F373 16-bit data DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit area specified by “S” has 6
P373 revision PDTR changed since the previous execution, internal
detection relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. “D” is used to
store the data of the previous execution.
F374 32-bit data DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit area specified by (S+1, S) 6
P374 revision PDDTR has changed since the previous execution, internal
detection relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. (D+1, D) is
used to store the data of the previous execution.

14-118
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F351 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P351

F352 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P352

F353 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P353

F354 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P354 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3) Note5) Note2) Note2)

Time series processing instruction

F355 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A

F356 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Note4) Note4)

Compare instructions
F373 N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P373

F374 N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P374

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH CPU Ver. 1.5 or later.
Note3) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k.
Note4) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.20 or later and FPΣ 32k.
Note5) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.13 or later.

14-119
 Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber

Index register bank processing instructions

F410 Setting the SETB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank number change over. 4
P410 index regis- PSETB
ter bank
number
F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank number change over 4
P411 index regis- PCHGB with remembering preceding bank number.
ter bank
number
F412 Restoring the POPB - Changes index register (I0 to ID) bank number 2
P412 index regis- PPOPB back to the bank before F411 (CHGB)/P411
ter bank (PCHGB) instruction.
number
File register bank processing instructions
F414 Setting the SBFL n File register bank number change over. 4
P414 file register PSBFL
bank number
F415 Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change over with 4
P415 file register PCBFL remembering preceding bank number.
bank number
F416 Restoring the PBFL - Changes file register bank number back to the 2
P416 file register PPBFL bank before F415 (CBFL)/P415 (PCBFL)
bank number instruction.

14-120
 Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M

Note1)

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
C14 C24 C56 C20

FP-X

FP-e
Note1)

Note1)
FPΣ
FP0

FP3

FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32

Index register bank processing instructions

F410 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P410

F411 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P411

F412 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P412

File register bank processing instructions

F414 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
P414

F415 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
P415

F416 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
P416

• A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

14-121
14.4 Table of Error codes
„ Difference in ERROR display
There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model.
Model Display Display method
FP1,FP-M,FP2,FP3,FP10SH LED ERROR. Continually lit
FPΣ,FP0, FP-X LED ERROR/ALARM Flashes/contunually lit
FP-e Screen display ERR. Continually lit

„ Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON

When the “ERROR” on the control unit (CPU unit) turns on or flashes, a self-diagnostic error or syntax
check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appopriate steps.

-Error Confirmation Method

Procedure:1.Use the programming tool software to call up the error code.
By executing the “STATUS DISPLAY”, the error code and content of error are
displayed.
2.Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code
ascertained above.

-Syntax check error

This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting
written in the program. When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode, the total check function
automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the
program.

When a syntax check error is detected

-ERROR turns on or flashes.
-Operation will not begin even after swirching to the RUN mode.
-Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode.

Clearing a syntax check error

By changing to the PROG.mode, the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off.

Steps to take for syntax error

Change to the PROG. mode, and then execute the total check function while online mode with the
programming tool connected. This will call up the content of error and the address where the error
occurred.
Correct the program while referring to the content of error.

14-122
-Self-diagnostic Error
This error occurs when the control unit (CPU unit) self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an
abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection, I/O
abnomal detection, and other devices.

When a self-diagnostic error occurs

- The ERROR turns on or flashes.
- The operation of the control unit (CPU unit) might stop depending on the contect of error and the
system
register setting.
- The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000(DT90000).
- In the case of operation error, the error address will stored in the DT9017(DT90017) and
DT9018(DT90018).

Clearing the self-diagnostic error

At the “STATUS DISPLAY”, execute the “error clear”. Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared.
-You can use the initialize/test switch to clear an error. However, this will also clear the contents of
operation memory.
-Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG.mode.
However, the contents of operation memory, not stored with the hold type data, will also be cleared.
-The error can also be cleared depending on the self-diagnostic error set instruction F148(ERR).

Steps to take for self-diagnostic error

The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents. For more details, use the error code
obtained above and consult the table of aself-diagnostic error codes.

„ MEWTOCOL-COM Transmission Errors

These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response
when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL-COM.

14-123
„ Table of Syntax Check Error
Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
A program with a syntax error has been
Syntax written.
E1 Stops A A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct
the error.
Two or more OT(Out) instructions and
KP(Keep) instructions are programmed
using the same relay.Also occurs when
using the same timer/counter number.
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct
Duplicated
E2 the program so that one relay
(Note) output Stops A A A A A A A A A
is not used for two or more OT
error instructions,Or, set the duplicated output
to “enable” in system register20. A
timer/counter instructon double definition
error will be detected even if double
output permission has been selected.
For instructions which must be used in a
pair such as jump (JP and LBL), one
instruction is either missing or in an
Not paired
E3 Stops incorrect position. A A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter
the two instructions which must
be used in a pair in the correct positions.
An instruction has been written which
does not agree with system register
settings. For example, the number
Para-meter setting in a program does not agree with
E4 mismatch Stops the timer/counter range setting. A A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode, check the
system register settings, and change so
that the settings and the instruction
agree.
An instruction which must be written in a
specific area (main program area or
subprogram area) has been written to a
E5 Program different area (for example, a subroutine
(Note) Stops A A A A A A A A A
area error SUB to RET is placed before an ED
instruction).
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter
the instruction into the correct area.
A:Available
Note) This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN.
In this case, nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue.

14-124
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
The program is too large to compile in
the program memory.
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and reduce
Compile the total number of steps for the
E6 memory Stops program. A A A A A A A
full error -FP10SH
If memory expansion is
possible,compilation will become
possible when the memory is expanded.
In the program, high-level instructions,
which execute in every scan and at the
leading edge of the trigger, are
programmed to be triggered by one
High-level contact. (e.g. F0 (MV) and P0 (PMV) are
E7 instruction Stops programmed using the same trigger A A A A A A
type error continuously.)
⇒ Correct the program so that the high-
level instructions executed in every scan
and only at the leading edge are
triggered separately.
High-level There is an incorrect operand in an
instruction which requires a specific
instruction
combination operands (for example, the
E8 operand Stops A A A A A A A A A
operands must all be of a certain type).
combina- ⇒ Enter the correct combination of
tion error operands.
No
Program may be damaged.
E9 program Stops A A
⇒Try to send the program again.
error
When inputting with the programming
Rewrite tool software,a delection,addition or
during change of order of an
Conti-
E10 RUN instruction(ED,LBL,SUB,RET,INT,IRET, A A A A
nues SSTP,and STPE) that cannot perform a
syntax
error rewrite during RUN is being attempted.
Nothing is written to the CPU.
A:Available

14-125
„ Table of Self-Diagnostic Error

FP1/FP-M
Opera-

FP10SH
Error

FP2SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FPΣ

FP-X
code

FP-e
FP0

FP2

FP3
status

Probably a hardware abnormality

E20 CPU error Stops A A A A
⇒Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E21
error1
RAM
E22
error2
Probably an abnormality in the internal
RAM Stops
E23 RAM. A A A A
error3
⇒Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E24
error4
RAM
E25
error5
Master
memory The models of master memories are A
E25 model Stops different. Use the master memories Note1

unmatch created with the same model. )

error
FP-e,FP0,FPΣ,and FP1
C14,C16:Probably a hardware
abnormality.
⇒ Please contact your dealer.
FP-X:
When the master memory cassette is
mounted, the master memor cassette
may be damaged. Remove the master
memory, and check whether the
ERROR turns off.
When the ERROR turned off, rewrite
the master memory as its contents are
damaged, and use it again.
When the ERROR does not turn off,
User’s please contact your dealer.
E26 Stops A A A A A A A A A
ROM error FP1 C24,C40,C56,C72,and FP-M:
Probably an abnormality in the memory
unit
⇒Program the memory unit again and
try to operate. If the same error is
detected, try to operate with another
memory unit.
FP2,FP2SH,FP10SH,and FP3:
There may be a problem with the
installed ROM.
-ROM is not installed.
-ROM contens are damaged.
-Program size stored on the ROM is
larger than the capacity of the ROM
⇒Check the contents of the ROM
Units installed exceed the
Unit
limitations.(i.e.,4 or more link units)
E27 installation Stops A A A A A A
⇒ Turn off the power and re-configure
error
units referring to the hardware manual.
Probably an abnormality in the system
System
register.
E28 register Stops A A
⇒ Check the system register setting or
error
initialize the system registers.
Note1) This error occurs on FP-X Ver2.0 or later. A:Available
14-126
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ

FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
Configu-
A parameter error was detected in the
ration
E29 Stops MEWNET-W2 configuration area. Set A A
parameter a correct parameter.
error
Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality.
E30 Stops ⇒ Please contact your dealer.
A
error 0
An interrupt occurred without an
interrupt request . A hardware problem
Interrupt
E31 Stops or error due to noise is possible. A A A A A A A A A
error 1 ⇒ Turn off the power and check the
noise conditions.
There is no interrupt program for an
interrupt which occurred.
Interrupt
E32 Stops ⇒ Check the number of the interrupt A A A A A A A A A
error 2 program and change it to agree with
the interrrupt request..
Multi-CPU This error occurs when a FP3/FP10SH
data CPU2 is used as CPU2 for a multi-CPU
E33 system.
A A
unmatch Stops
error ⇒Refer to “Multi-CPU system Manual”.
An abnormal unit is installed.
-FPΣ, FP-X, FP2,FP2SH and
FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
register DT90036 and locate the
I/O status abnormal unit.Then turn off the power
E34 Stops and replace the unit with a new one.
A A A A A A
error
-FP3:
Check the contents of special data
register DT9036 and locate the
abnormal unit. Then turn off the power
and replace the unit with a new one.
MEWNET-F A unit, which cannot be installed on the
slave station of the MEWNET-F link
slave
E35 Stops system,is installed on the slave station. A A A A
illegal unit ⇒Remove the illegal unit from the
error slave station.
MEWNET-F The number of slots or I/O points used
(remore for MEWNET-F(remote I/O) system
exceeds the limitation.
E36 I/O) Stops ⇒Re-configure the system so that the
A A A A
limitation number of slots and I/O points is within
error the specified range.
MEWNET-F I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over
I/O the range is detected in the allocated
E37 Stops I/O and MEWNET-F I/O map.
A A A A
mapping
error ⇒Re-configure the I/O map correctly
A:Available

14-127
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ

FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
I/O mapping for remote I/O terminal
MEWNET-F
boards,remote I/O terminal units and
slave I/O
I/O link is not correct.
E38 terminal Stops A A A A
⇒Re-configure the I/O map for slave
mapping
stations according to the I/O points of
error
the slave stations.
When reading in the program from the
IC memory card(due to automatic
reading because of the dip switch
setting or program switching due to
F14(PGRD) instruction):
- IC memory card is not installed.
- There is no program file or it is
IC card damaged.
E39 Stops A A
read error - Writing is disabled.
- There is an abnormality in the
AUTOEXEC.SPG file.
- Program size stored on the card is
larger than the capacity of the CPU.
⇒Install an IC memory card that has
the program proterly recorded and
execute the read once again.
Abnormal I/O unit.
FPΣ, FP-X:
Check the contents of special data
register DT90002 and abnormal FPΣ
expansion unit (application cassette for
FP-X). Then check the unit.
FP2 and FP2SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers DT90002,DT90003 and
abnormal I/O unit.Then check the unit.
Selection of operation status using
system register21:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN
Sele-
E40 I/O error GR/Pro at”I/O error” in the status A A A A A A
ctable
display function.
MEWNET-TR communication error
FP3 and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers(FP3:DT9002,DT9003,FP10S
H:DT90002,DT90003) and the
erroneous master unit and abnormal
I/O unit. Then check the unit.
Selection of operation status using
system register21:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN
GR/Pro at”I/O error” in the status
display function.
A:Available

14-128
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
An abnormality in an intelligent unit.
FPΣ, FP-X:
Check the contetns of special data
register “DT90006” and locate the
abnormal FP intelligent unit (application
cassette for FP-X).
FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers DT90006,DT90007 and locate
the abnormal intelligent unit.Then check
the unit referring to its manual..
Selection of operation status using
system register22:
Intelligent Selec-
E41 -to continue operation,set 1 A A A A A A
unit error table -to stop operation,set 0
FP3:
Check the contents of special data
registers DT9006,DT9007 and locate the
abnormal intelligent unit.Then check the
unit referring to its manual..
Selection of operation status using
system register22:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display
function.
I/O unit(Expansion unit) wiring condition
has changed compared to that at time fo
power-up.
⇒ Check the contents of special data
register (FP0: DT9010,
FPΣ, FP-X: DT90010,DT90011) and
locate the erroneous expansion unit.
It checks whether an expansion
connector is in agreement.
I/O unit Selec- ⇒ Check the contents of special data
E42 A A A A A A A
verify error table register (FP2,FP2SH,and
FP10SH:DT90010,DT90011,FP3
DT9010,DT9011)
Selection of operation status using
system register23:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display
function.
A:Available

14-129
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
Scan time required for program
execution exceeds the setting of the
system watching dog timer.
System ⇒ Check the program and modify it so
watching Selec- that the program can execute a scan
E43 A A
dog timer table within the specified time.
error Selection of operation status using
system register24:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Slave
The time required for slave station
staiton connection exceeds the setting of the
connecting system register 35.
Selec-
E44 time error Selection of operation status using A A A A
table system register25:
for
-to continue operation,set 1
MEWNET-F
-to stop operation,set 0
system
Operation became impossible when a
high-level instruction was executed.
Selection of operation status using
system register26:
-to continue operation,set K1
-to stop operation,set K0
In the FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH,Check
the contents of special data registers
DT90017,DT90018 to find the instruction
Operation Selec-
E45 address where the operation error A A A A A A A A A
error table occurred. Then correct the program.
In the FP3,Check the contents of special
data registers DT9017,and DT9018 to
find the instruction address where the
operation error occurred.Then correct
the program.
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display
function.
A:Available

14-130
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
S-LINK error Occurs only in FP0-SL1
When one of the S-LINK errors (ERR1, 3
or 4) has been deteced,error code E46
(remote I/O (S-LINK) communication
Selec-
error) is stored. A
table Selection of operation status using
system register27:
-to continue operation,set K1
-to stop operation,set K0
MEWNET-F communication error
Remote A communication abnormally was
I/O caused by a transmission cable or during
the power-down of a slave station.
E46 commu- FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
nication Check the contents of special data
error registers DT90131 to DT90137 and
locate the abnormal slave station and
Selec- recover the communication condition.
FP3: A A A A A
table
Check the contents of special data
registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate
the abnormal slave station and recover
the communication condition.
Selection of operation status using
system register27:
-to continue operation,set K1
-to stop operation,set K0
In the unit on the slave station, an
abnormallty such as:
-missing unit
-abnormal intelligent unit was detected.
FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers DT90131 to DT90137 and
MEW-NET- locate the abnormal slave station and
F Selec- recover the slave condition.
E47 A A A A
attribute table FP3:
error Check the contents of special data
registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate
the abnormal slave station and recover
the slave condition.
Selection of operation status using
system register28:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Expansion The power supply for the expansion unit
unit power was turned on after the control unit.
E49 supply Stops Turn on the power supply for the A
sequence expansion unit at the same time or
before the control unit is turend on.
error
A:Available

14-131
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
The voltage of the backup battery
lowered or the backup battery of conrol
Backup unit is not installed. A
Conti- ⇒ Check the installation of the backup Note
E50 battery A A A A A A A
nues battery and then replace battery if )
errror necessary.
By setting the system register 4, you can
disregard this self-diagnostic error.
MEWNET-F Terminal station setting was not properly
performed.
terminal Conti-
E51 Check stations at both ends of the A A A A
station nues communication path,and set them in the
error terminal station using the dip switches.
Set the INITIALIZE/TEST
MEWNET-F selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the
I/O update Conti- INITIALIZE position while keeping the
E52 A A A A
synchro- nues mode selector in the RUN position.If the
nous error same error occurs after this,please
contact your dealer.
Multi-CPU
I/O regis-
Abnormality was detected when the multi-
tration Conti-
E53 CPU system ws used. A A
error nues Please contact your dealer.
(CPU2
only)
The voltage of the backup battery for the
IC memory IC memory card lowered. The BATT.LED
card back- Conti- does not turn on.
E54 A A
up battery nues Charge or replace the backup battry of IC
error memory card.(The contents of the IC
memory card cannot be guaranteed.)
The voltage of the backup battery for IC
IC memory memory card lowers.The BATT.LED does
not turn on.
card back- Cont-
E55 Charge or replace the backup battery of A A
up battery inues IC memory card.
error (The contents of the IC memory card
cannot be guaranteed.)
Incompat- The IC memory card installed is not
ible IC Cont- compatible.
E56 A A
memory inues Replace the IC memory card compatible
card error with FP2SH/FP10SH.
MEWNET-W2
No unit for The MEWNET-W2 link unit is not
the Conti- installed in the slot specified using the
E57 A A
configu- nues configuration data.
ration Either install a unit in the specified slot or
change the parameter.
A:Available

14-132
 Opera-

FP1/FP-M
Error

FP10SH
Name tion Description and steps to take

FP2SH
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
status

FP0

FP2

FP3
E100 Self- The error specified by the F148
to diagnostic Stop (ERR)/P148(PERR) instruction is A A A A A A
occurred.
E199 error set ⇒ Take steps to clear the error condition
by F148 according to the specification you chose.
E200
(ERR)/P148 Conti-
to A A A A A A
(PERR) nues
E299
instruction
A:Available
Note) Available PLC:FP1 C24,C40,C56,C76,and FP-M

14-133
„ Table of MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Error

Error
Name Description
code

!21 NACK error Link system error

!22 WACK error Link system error
!23 Unit No. overlap Link system error
Transmission format
!24 Link system error
error
Link unit hardware
!25 Link system error
error
!26 Unit No. setting error Link system error
!27 No support error Link system error
!28 No response error Link system error
!29 Buffer closed error Link system error
!30 Time-out error Link system error
Transmission
!32 Link system error
impossible error
!33 Communication stop Link system error
!36 No destination error Link system error
Other communication
!38 Link system error
error
!40 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data.
!41 Format error A command was received that does not fit the format.
!42 No support error A command was received that is not supported.
Multiple frames A different command was received when processing multiple
!43
procedure error frames.
A route number that does not exist was spacified. Verify the
!50 Link setting error
route number by designating the transmission station.
Transmission Transmission to anather device not possible because
!51
time-out error transmissition buffer is congested.
Transmit disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible.(Link
!52
error unit runaway,etc.)
Command process cannot be received because of multiple
!53 Busy error frame processing.Or,cannot be received because command
being processed is congested.
!60 Parameter error Content of spacified parameter does not exist or cannot be used.
There was a mistake in the contact,data area,data number
!61 Data error
desigination,size designation,range,or format designation.
Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded
!62
error or when there was no registration.
PC command that cannot be processed was executed during
!63 PC mode error
RUN mode.

14-134
Error
Name Description
code

An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM/IC memory

card.There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card.
-When loading,the specified contents exceeded the capacity.
External memory
!64 -Write error occurs.
error
-ROM or IC memory card is not installed.
-ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications
-ROM or IC memory card board is not installed.
A program or system register write operation was executed when
!65 Protect error theb protect mode (password setting or DIP switch,etc.)or ROM
operation mode was being used.
There was an error in the code format of the address data.
!66 Address error Alsi.when exceeded or insufficient of address data,there was a
mistake in the range designation.
Cannot be read because there is no program in the program
No program error
!67 area or the memory contains an error.Or,reading was attempted
and No data error
of data that was not registered.
When inputting with programming tool software,editing of an
Rewrite during RUN instruction (ED,SUB,RET,INT,IRET,SSTP,and STPE) that
!68
error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted.
Nothing is written to the CPU.
!70 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process.
Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same
!71
control error time as a command being processed.

14-135
14.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands
Table of MEWTOCOL-COM commands
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contact.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter ellapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using the
Monitoring start MG
code “MC or MD”.
Embeds the areaof a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.

14-136
14.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD
BCD data
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data
(Binary Coded Decimal)
0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111
8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000
9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001
10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000
11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001
12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010
13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011
14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100
15 000F 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101
16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110
17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111
18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000
19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001
20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000
21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001
22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010
23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011
24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100
25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101
26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110
27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111
28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000
29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001
30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000
31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
255 00FF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001

14-137
14.7 ASCII Codes

14-138
FP0 Record of changes

Record of changes
ACG No. Date Description of Changes
ACG-M0084-1 JAN. 1997 First edition
ACG-M0084-2 JUL. 1997 2nd edition
− Size change (from A5 to B5)
− Newly addition of FP0 transistor output type
information
ACG-M0084-3 JUN. 1998 3rd edition
− Descriptions for FP0 control units with RS232C port
are added.
− Descriptions for FP0 input only and output only type
expansion units are added.
− Descriptions for FP0 analog I/O unit is added.
ARCT1F389E FEB. 2004 4th edition
− Programming Manual Chapter 4
(ACG−M0084−3) Chapter 5
Chapter 6 Addition
Chapter 8
− S−LINK Control Unit ARCT1F263E
− Chapter 8 Connecting the I.O.P.
Display Panel Delete
− Chapter 9 Trial Operation
ARCT1F389E−1 FEB. 2006 5th edition

ARCT1F389E−2 JUN. 2007 6th edition

R−1
ARCT1F389E-2_0706.ai

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

®
FP0

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
User’s Manual

FP0 User’s Manual

These materials are printed on ECF pulp.

These materials are printed with earth-friendly vegetable-based (soybean oil) ink.
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Please contact ..........

Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Automation Controls Business Unit
쮿 Head Office: 1048, Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8686, Japan
쮿 Telephone: +81-6-6908-1050
쮿 Facsimile: +81-6-6908-5781
http://www.mew.co.jp/ac/e/
FP0 User’s Manual
All Rights Reserved © 2007 COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. ARCT1F389E-2 ’07.06
ARCT1F389E-2 200706 Specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan.
ACG-M389E-2

http://www.mew.co.jp/ac/e/fasys/ Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.